Wireless Enerprise Manager (WEM) Operation Manual

WEM Operation Manual Version 1.0

WEM Operation Manual Version 1.0

This manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics America, and is protected by copyright. No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial purposes or disclosed to the third party in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics America.

TRADEMARKS

Product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

This manual should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product. All reasonable care has been made to ensure that this document is accurate.

WEM Operation Manual Version 1.0

INTRODUCTION

Purpose This manual provides explanations about necessary information for using Wireless Enterprise Manager (WEM) such as registering and managing users and instructions on various menu options.

Document Content and Organization This manual consists of 9 Chapters and 2 Annex and an Abbreviation section. The summary of the Chapters are as follows:

CHAPTER 1. WEM Overview This chapter describes the WEM system information and basic functions.

CHAPTER 2. WEM Interface This chapter describes the log-in procedure for the WEM, the basic operation methods for operating WEM and the methods of the network management.

CHAPTER 3. Monitor This chapter describes WEM’s Monitoring windows and their functions.

CHAPTER 4. Configuration This chapter describes WEM’s Configuration windows and their functions.

CHAPTER 5. Admin This chapter describes WEM’s Operation Management windows and their functions.

CHAPTER 6. Tools This chapter describes WEM’s Tool windows and their functions.

CHAPTER 7. General This chapter describes WEM’s General management windows and their functions.

CHAPTER 8. Security This chapter describes WEM’s Security windows and their functions.

CHAPTER 9. Help This chapter describes WEM server information using Help window.

ANNEX A. Alarm List Describes Alarm List.

ANNEX B. Open Source Announcement Describes Open Source Announcement.

ABBREVIATION Describes the acronyms used in this manual.

Conventions The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read and thoroughly understood. Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular box, separating it from the main text, but is always preceded by an icon and/or a bold title.

CHECKPOINT Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation.

NOTE Indicates additional information as a reference.

Revision History

VERSION DATE OF ISSUE REMARKS

1.0 July 2015 North America Release Version

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 3

Purpose ...... 3 Document Content and Organization ...... 3 Conventions ...... 4 Revision History ...... 5

CHAPTER 1. WEM Overview 14

1.1 WEM ...... 14

1.2 System Specifications ...... 16 1.2.1 Hardware Specifications ...... 16 1.2.2 Software Specifications ...... 17

CHAPTER 2. WEM Interface 18

2.1 Connecting to WEM ...... 18 2.1.1 Log-in ...... 18 2.1.2 Log-out ...... 20

2.2 Interface Structure ...... 21 2.2.1 Menu Frame ...... 22 2.2.2 Main Frame ...... 23 2.2.3 Tree Viewer Frame ...... 24

2.3 Basic Operation ...... 25 2.3.1 Buttons ...... 25 2.3.2 Basic Properties ...... 25

2.4 Network Viewer ...... 27 2.4.1 Group Node ...... 28 2.4.2 Controller Node ...... 30 2.4.3 Cluster Auto Configuration ...... 32 2.4.4 Remove Cluster Auto Configuration ...... 32 2.4.5 Switch Nodes ...... 33

CHAPTER 3. Monitor 36

3.1 Alarms ...... 37 3.1.1 Current Alarms ...... 37 3.1.2 Alarm History ...... 39

3.2 Controller/Device ...... 41 3.2.1 Summarized Controller/Device Information ...... 41 3.2.2 Detailed Information on Controller ...... 42

3.3 AP ...... 55 3.3.1 Summarized AP Information ...... 55 3.3.2 Detailed Information on AP ...... 59

3.4 Station ...... 69 3.4.1 Summarized Station Information ...... 69 3.4.2 Detailed Station Information ...... 73

3.5 Repor t ...... 79 3.5.1 Alarm ...... 80 3.5.2 Station ...... 82 3.5.3 Controller ...... 84 3.5.4 AP ...... 86 3.5.5 Security ...... 88 3.5.6 Network Quality ...... 91 3.5.7 Guest Users ...... 93 3.5.8 Integrated Report ...... 94

3.6 RF Map ...... 97 3.6.1 Root View ...... 98 3.6.2 Campus View ...... 100 3.6.3 Building View...... 105 3.6.4 Floor View ...... 107

3.7 Dashboard ...... 114

3.8 Topology ...... 118

3.9 Security ...... 120 3.9.1 Interferer ...... 120 3.9.2 Rogue AP ...... 121 3.9.3 Access Control List (ACL) ...... 122

3.10 Remote Resource Management (RRM) ...... 123

3.11 WIPS ...... 124 3.11.1 Registering WIPS Server ...... 125 3.11.2 Searching WIPS Event ...... 126

3.12 DPI ...... 128 3.12.1 Summary ...... 128 3.12.2 Wlans ...... 130 3.12.3 Devices ...... 131 3.12.4 Users ...... 132 3.12.5 Application ...... 134

CHAPTER 4. Configuration 136

4.1 Controller/Device ...... 136 4.1.1 System ...... 137 4.1.2 WLAN ...... 143 4.1.3 Radio ...... 152 4.1.4 Interface ...... 163 4.1.5 Security ...... 167 4.1.6 ACL ...... 178 4.1.7 DHCP ...... 183 4.1.8 QoS ...... 187 4.1.9 RBAC ...... 188 4.1.10 AP ...... 191 4.1.11 AP group...... 192 4.1.12 Mobility...... 199 4.1.13 Management ...... 200

4.2 AP ...... 213 4.2.1 AP summary information ...... 213 4.2.2 System ...... 215 4.2.3 Radio ...... 218 4.2.4 Remote AP ...... 220

4.3 Mobility Group ...... 222 4.3.1 Cluster Lists ...... 222

4.4 Controller Template ...... 223 4.4.1 Template ...... 223 4.4.2 System ...... 226 4.4.3 WLAN ...... 228 4.4.4 Radio ...... 231 4.4.5 Security ...... 242 4.4.6 ACL ...... 243 4.4.7 DHCP ...... 244 4.4.8 QoS ...... 245 4.4.9 AP ...... 246

4.4.10 Management ...... 247

4.5 AP Template ...... 256 4.5.1 Template ...... 256 4.5.2 System ...... 258 4.5.3 Radio ...... 261 4.5.4 Security ...... 263 4.5.5 ACL ...... 264 4.5.6 DHCP ...... 265 4.5.7 QoS ...... 266 4.5.8 AP ...... 267 4.5.9 Management ...... 268

4.6 Security ...... 277 4.6.1 Interferer ...... 277

CHAPTER 5. Admin 278

5.1 Alarm 278 5.1.1 Audible Alarm ...... 278 5.1.2 Ticketing group ...... 279 5.1.3 Ticketing setup ...... 280 5.1.4 Ticketing History ...... 281 5.1.5 Level/blocking control ...... 281 5.1.6 Filter setup...... 282 5.1.7 User-defined Alarms ...... 283

5.2 Software ...... 285 5.2.1 Package management ...... 285 5.2.2 Package upgrade ...... 286

5.3 Setup ...... 289 5.3.1 Data server ...... 289

5.4 License ...... 291

CHAPTER 6. Tools 293

6.1 Spectrum Analyzer...... 293

6.2 VQM 294 6.2.1 Control ...... 294 6.2.2 Monitoring ...... 296 6.2.3 Statistics ...... 297 6.2.4 History ...... 301

6.3 Packet Capture ...... 302

6.3.1 APC Packet Capture ...... 302 6.3.2 AP Packet Capture ...... 304 6.3.3 Using Packet Capture Program ...... 305

CHAPTER 7. General 306

7.1 Surveillance ...... 306 7.1.1 Network Status ...... 306 7.1.2 Process Status ...... 307

7.2 Monitoring ...... 310

7.3 Resource Manager ...... 311 7.3.1 CPU ...... 311 7.3.2 Memory ...... 312 7.3.3 File System ...... 312 7.3.4 DB Usage ...... 313 7.3.5 Network Interface ...... 314

7.4 Database Manager ...... 315 7.4.1 Backup ...... 315 7.4.2 Schedule ...... 316 7.4.3 Backup File...... 316 7.4.4 History...... 317 7.4.5 Storage Period ...... 317 7.4.6 Diagnosis ...... 318

7.5 Self Diagnosis ...... 319

CHAPTER 8. Security 320

8.1 User Manager ...... 320 8.1.1 User Manager ...... 320 8.1.2 Command Manager ...... 322

8.2 Change Password ...... 323

8.3 Group Manager ...... 324

8.4 IP Manager ...... 326

8.5 Login History ...... 328 8.5.1 Login History ...... 328 8.5.2 Login Session...... 329

8.6 Operation History ...... 330

CHAPTER 9. Help 331

ANNEX A. Alarm List 332

ABBREVIATION 379

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1. Samsung WLAN Network Configuration ...... 14 Figure 2. Log-in window ...... 19 Figure 3. Log-out Button ...... 20 Figure 4. WEM Frame Structure ...... 21 Figure 5. Menu Frame ...... 22 Figure 6. Main Frame ...... 23 Figure 7. Tree Viewer Frame ...... 24 Figure 8. Example of Setting Period ...... 25 Figure 9. Calendar Window ...... 26 Figure 10. Tree Viewer (node structure) ...... 27 Figure 11. Tree Viewer (pop-up menu) ...... 28 Figure 12. Adding a Group Window ...... 28 Figure 13. Deleting a Group Window ...... 29 Figure 14. Change Group Window...... 29 Figure 15. Adding Controller Window ...... 30 Figure 16. Controller Node Delete ...... 31 Figure 17. Switch Registration Menu Window...... 33 Figure 18. Window for Confirming Switch Deletion ...... 34 Figure 19. Window for Confirming Automatic AP Configuration ...... 35 Figure 20. Screen for Information on Configuration between Switch and AP ...... 35 Figure 21. Current Alarm Window ...... 37 Figure 22. Current Alarm (Condition Dialog) ...... 38 Figure 23. Summarized Controller Information Window ...... 41 Figure 24. WEC8500 Configuration ...... 42 Figure 25. WEC8050 Configuration ...... 43 Figure 26. Resource/Environment Information...... 45 Figure 27. Controller Temperature Information ...... 45 Figure 28. Port Information ...... 47 Figure 29. Summarized Information Screen ...... 55 Figure 30. Screen of Setting Number of List Lines of APs per Page ...... 57

Figure 31. Screen on Specifying Search Conditions ...... 57 Figure 32. Link Test Screen ...... 58 Figure 33. Traffic History Information ...... 59 Figure 34. CPU Load History Information ...... 60 Figure 35. Map Location ...... 60 Figure 36. Real Time Channel Usage ...... 64 Figure 37. Real Time Air Quality ...... 65 Figure 38. History of Channel Usage ...... 65 Figure 39. History of Air Quality ...... 66 Figure 40. History of Radio Traffic ...... 66 Figure 41. Summarized Station Information Screen ...... 69 Figure 42. Screen on Setting Number of List Lines of Stations per Page ...... 70 Figure 43. Screen on Specifying Search Conditions ...... 70 Figure 44. Total Amount of Station Traffic ...... 72 Figure 45. Station Distribution by Data Transmission Rate ...... 72 Figure 46. Station Traffic Usage ...... 75 Figure 47. Stattion Traffic Usage and Station RSSI/SNR ...... 76 Figure 48. History of Connection of Station ...... 76 Figure 49. Station Troubleshooting ...... 78 Figure 50. Speicify the Alarm Conditions ...... 80 Figure 51. Specify the Report Schedule ...... 81 Figure 52. Generate the Station Report ...... 83 Figure 53. Generate the Controller Report ...... 85 Figure 54. Generate AP Report ...... 87 Figure 55. Generate Rogue AP Report ...... 88 Figure 56. Generate Interferer Report ...... 90 Figure 57. Generate Network Quality Report...... 92 Figure 58. Creating Integrated Report ...... 95 Figure 59. RF Map Window ...... 97 Figure 60. Root View Window ...... 98 Figure 61. Campus View Window ...... 100 Figure 62. Building on the campus view object is created the appearance ...... 102 Figure 63. Current Window ...... 104 Figure 64. Saved screen image ...... 104 Figure 65. Floor View Resisted Window ...... 106 Figure 66. Floor View Window ...... 107 Figure 67. AP Object completed registration ...... 109 Figure 68. Planning Mode Window ...... 111 Figure 69. Dash Board Window ...... 114

Figure 70. Contents Window ...... 115 Figure 71. Topology Window ...... 118 Figure 72. WIPS Screen ...... 124 Figure 73. WIPS Server Addition ...... 125 Figure 74. DPI-Summary1 ...... 128 Figure 75. DPI-Summary2 ...... 128 Figure 76. Main Screen of DPI-Wlans ...... 130 Figure 77. Detailed Screen of DPI-Wlans ...... 130 Figure 78. Main Screen of DPI-Devices ...... 131 Figure 79. Detailed Screen of DPI-Devices...... 132 Figure 80. Main Screen of DPI-Users ...... 132 Figure 81. Detailed Screen of DPI-Users ...... 133 Figure 82. Main Screen of DPI-Application ...... 134 Figure 83. Detailed Screen of DPI-Application ...... 135 Figure 84. Summarized Controller Information Screen (consider changing) ...... 136 Figure 85. Summary information screen ...... 213 Figure 86. Search condition setup screen ...... 214 Figure 87. Template List Screen ...... 223 Figure 88. Template Adding Screen ...... 223 Figure 89. Application on Template List Screen ...... 224 Figure 90. Application on Adding and Changing Screens ...... 224 Figure 91. Application on Screens of Adding and Changing Templates with Table ...... 225 Figure 92. Controller Selection and Application ...... 225 Figure 93. Template List Screen ...... 256 Figure 94. Template Adding Screen ...... 256 Figure 95. Application on Template List Screen ...... 257 Figure 96. Application on Adding and Changing Screens ...... 257 Figure 97. Controller Selection and Application ...... 258 Figure 98. VQM Control ...... 295 Figure 99. VQM Monitoring ...... 296 Figure 100. VQM Status Board ...... 298 Figure 101. VQM Report ...... 299 Figure 102. Detailed Information on VQM ...... 300 Figure 103. VQM File History ...... 301 Figure 104. APC Packet Capture ...... 302 Figure 105. AP Packet Capture ...... 304 Figure 106. WEM Help Window ...... 331

CHAPTER 1. WEM Overview

This chapter describes the functions and specifications of Samsung Wireless Enterprise Manager.

1.1 WEM The WEM is a powerful centralized management system that provides to manage and configure the WLAN network and check the status of the Samsung Network Elements (Access Point Controller, Access Point and Switch).

The WEM operates in Client-Server Processing Mode. The Server provides the interface between the Client and Network Elements by directly connecting to the WEM Server, and manages various databases as well.

The Client functions as a terminal that provides the operator interface to access the WLAN Network Elements through WEM Server. The WEM Server was developed using Java Server Page (JSP), Servlet, Remote Method Invocation (RMI), Java Database Connectivity (JDBC), and Extensible Markup Language (XML). WEM Client was developed using Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), Java Applet, Java Script, and Flex. The interface between WEM and Network Elements (NE) are as follows:

Client Printer

Server WEM

IP Network

Conected System WE AP-1

WE AP-2 AP Controller WE AP-3

Figure 1. Samsung WLAN Network Configuration

The WEM provides the following various functions.

Real-Time System Status Monitoring WEM collects various fault statuses that have occurred in the system in real-time using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

Graphic User interface The standard graphic interface was used to develop WEM. All orders are configured with graphic menus so operators can easily understand and operate the WEM functions.

Various Statistics Reports The WEM provides the operator with the data such as information on defects, performance, and traffic in the type of text, graph, and statistics. This statistics data can be retrieved as a file or can be printed.

Object Oriented Design The Object-oriented approach was used to design WEM. Since various sub-systems are separated into objects, it is easy to add or upgrade required functions.

Error Handling If WEM is unable to handle the input order properly, error messages will be displayed before performing subsequent tasks. Operators can operate the system accurately and effectively by checking the error messages before performing the fault orders.

Flexible Platform WEM can be installed and operated in various platforms such as a regular PC or work station. Therefore, operators can select the appropriate WEM platforms in accordance with network size or management range.

1.2 System Specifications 1.2.1 Hardware Specifications Server

Category Specification

CPU (Central Processing Unit) 3.0 GHz (Intel Zeon Quad core processor) or higher Main Memory 16 GB or higher Hard Disk 300 GB or higher Hard Disk Drive DVD-ROM Drive Monitor 1280 × 1024 resolution LAN Card 10/100 Base-T (RJ-45 Connector)

Client

Category Specification

CPU 3.0 GHz (Pentium Core 2 Duo Processor) or higher Main Memory 2 GB or higher Hard Disk 100 GB hard disk or higher Driver CD-ROM Driver Monitor 1280 × 1024 resolution LAN Card 10/100 Base-T (RJ-45 Connector)

Hardware Specifications

Above Description and specifications are mentioned based on Large Scale Network HW specification shall be changed according to the Network size and configuration.

1.2.2 Software Specifications Server

Category Software

OS Linux (Red Hat Enterprise ES 5.5~6.3) Not Included JSP/Servlet engine Tomcat 5.0.28 Database MySQL Enterprise 5.5 JVM JDK 1.6.0_20 Management Protocol SNMP Others Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol), Telnet (SSH)

To ensure optimum performance, we recommend using the same version as stated above.

Client

Category Software

OS Windows XP~Windows 7 Web Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 8.0~10.0 recommended Java JRE 1.7.0_25 Flash Player Flash Player 11 Active X Version

To ensure optimum performance, we recommend using the same version as stated above.

CHAPTER 2. WEM Interface

This chapter explains Graphic User Interface (GUI) of WEM and basic operating methods for WEM.

2.1 Connecting to WEM This section explains WEM log-in and log-out procedures.

2.1.1 Log-in Log-in procedure for WEM operation is explained below:

1) Open a Web browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer) to connect to WEM Server.

2) Enter Internet Protocol (IP) address of the WEM server in the address field and the log-in window appears.

Figure 2. Log-in window

3) Enter the User ID and password in the corresponding fields and click ‘Login’ button.

4) Once the user information is verified, the WEM window appears.

2.1.2 Log-out WEM log-out procedure is explained below:

Figure 3. Log-out Button

1) Click the ‘Logout’ button at the top left of the WEM window. A pop-up window will appear to confirm logout. 2) Click ‘OK’ button to log-out.

The Operation of WEM in Logout State

Even when you are logged out, the WEM System continues to perform certain functions, such as generating error messages and collecting the performance data’s etc.

2.2 Interface Structure The WEM window consists of the following three frames:  Menu Frame  Main Frame  Tree Viewer Frame

Menu Frame

Tree Viewer Frame Main Frame

Figure 4. WEM Frame Structure

2.2.1 Menu Frame These groups can be seen on the WEM menu frame and various commands from each management group can be executed.

The menu frame consists of the following elements: number order is reversed

Figure 5. Menu Frame

Item Description

WEM’s logo and name User menu consists of 7 management groups. Network Element Search (Such as registered ACP, AP mobile station’s) User information (user ID and group) Logout button Displaying alarm count Hides/Shows Quick Icon Bar. - : On/Off the audible alarm - : Mute the audible alarm - : Execute Dash Board - : Execute Event Viewer - : Hides/Shows Tree Viewer. Displays connection status between the WEM server and client.

Description for Quick Icon Bar Button

Button Description

Execute Network Viewer function.

Execute RF (Radio Frequency) MAP function.

Execute spectrum analysis function

Execute statistics function. No longer present?

Display the summary information of the wireless terminal and its location move

tracks.

2.2.2 Main Frame Once a user executes a command in the menu frame, the main frame displays the corresponding function window. By default the main frame displays the network viewer at the initial state.

Figure 6. Main Frame

2.2.3 Tree Viewer Frame Tree Viewer frame displays network elements in tree format. Tree Viewer frame displays the form of tree with the highest group, cluster, and controller order of this inferiority.

Figure 7. Tree Viewer Frame

Icons The Tree Viewer has the icons shown in the figure below to identify the status of the network elements and alarm severity. However, the WEM icon does not indicate an alarm status.

Network Major Minor Normal Disabled Critical (Red) Element (Orange) (Yellow) WEM - - - - Controller

Search Function Each network elements are displayed in the Tree Viewer, user can search Network element in the search box at the top of the tree viewer.

2.3 Basic Operation This section describes the basic elements for operating WEM.

2.3.1 Buttons The command buttons used in WEM are designed to run the same functions in all windows. Command buttons commonly used in WEM are as listed below:

Button Description

Activates the job. Deletes the data. Deactivates the job. Executes command. Displays data that have already been configured or saved Saves the data. Searches data that have already been configured or saved Defines properties for the data or function Tests the job.

2.3.2 Basic Properties Users shall generally set up a few elements while executing WEM functions. Users may also need to set up search period for certain jobs

Figure 8. Example of Setting Period

The date can either be directly entered in the text box in the required format or can be selected in the calendar by clicking the calendar button ( ).

Figure 9. Calendar Window

Set the date using the ( ) ( ) button. Select a date to save the items for the selected dates to Main Frame.

2.4 Network Viewer This section allows you to view Network Name, sub network, Network Element (NE) in hierarchal level and configured in tree shape for operators to easily understand the top to bottom structure of WEM Network Elements. Each network elements are called node.

Node Description

WEM A node used to indicate the top parent class (Root) in the Tree Viewer. Group A node used to manage controller by grouping. Cluster A node used to manage controller by cluster. Controller Group containing the controller node Switch Switch node which is controlled by WEM

The following picture is the sample screen of the tree viewer. The target content can be variously changed according to the group or the equipment organization.

WEM

Group/Cluster

Switch

Controller

Figure 10. Tree Viewer (node structure)

Select a specific node in the Tree Viewer and right-click on it. A pop-up menu will appear to add, delete, view and modify the data of node.

Figure 11. Tree Viewer (pop-up menu)

Tree View A controller must be registered before to add/modify/delete data in the list.

2.4.1 Group Node Group Node is made by grouping the controller in devices, local, or cluster.

Creating a Group 1) Right-click on a WEM node in the Tree Viewer.

2) Click ‘Add Group’ in the pop-up menu.

3) Select the ‘Group Type’ and enter the ‘Group Name’ in the ‘Add Group Window’ displayed.

Figure 12. Adding a Group Window

4) Enter the group node name in ‘Name’ item, enter the ‘General’ or ‘Cluster’ in ‘Group Type’ item.

5) Click ‘OK’ button to add corresponding group in the Tree Viewer.

Deleting a Group 1) Select a group to delete in the Tree Viewer, and right-click on it. 2) Click ‘Delete Group’ in the pop-up menu. 3) A pop-up window appears to confirm, click ‘Yes’, to delete the selected group.

Figure 13. Deleting a Group Window

Modifying Group Information 1) Select a group to modify in the Tree Viewer, and right-click on it. 2) Click ‘Modify Group’ in the pop-up menu. 3) Select and change the data which you want to modify in the displayed window. 4) Click ‘OK’, to complete the modify the group information.

Figure 14. Change Group Window

2.4.2 Controller Node Adding a Controller 1) Right-click on the group in the Tree Viewer.

2) Select ‘Add Controller’ in the pop-up menu.

3) The window is displayed to add Controller.

Figure 15. Adding Controller Window

4) Set the each field by input parameter. The operator can view processing status in the ‘Ready’ option at the bottom of window.

Parameter Description

GROUP Controller node group NAME Controller name LOCATION Controller’s location TYPE Controller Type IP ADDRESS IP address of the controller SNMP VER SNMP version of the controller GET COMMUNITY Get the SNMP Community SET COMMUNITY Set the SNMP Community SNMP PORT SNMP port of the controller USER NAME SNMPv3parameter-set user name SECURITY LEVEL SNMPv3 parameter-set the security level AUTH ALGORITHM SNMPv3 parameter-authentication algorithm AUTH PASSWORD SNMPv3 parameter-authentication password PRIV ALGORITHM SNMPv3 parameter-each algorithm PRIV PASSWORD SNMPv3 parameter-each password

5) Click ‘Add’ button.

6) You can check the Controller added in the Tree Viewer.

Deleting a Controller 1) Select a Controller to delete in the Tree Viewer, and right-click on it.

2) Click ‘Delete Controller’ in the pop-up menu.

3) A pop-up window appears to confirm.

Figure 16. Controller Node Delete

4) Click ‘Yes’, to delete the selected Controller.

2.4.3 Cluster Auto Configuration Cluster provides redundancy and easy network configuration for AP’s Network. If one APC fails, other APC in that cluster will take over the failed APC’s Network Load. To configure cluster, Each Controllers must have cluster member information. By using WEM, Operator can set cluster member information to each controllers automatically. If using this function, Each Controllers will be lost previous cluster information. So, operator should plan this activity because it will affect the current service

During the auto configuration, If SNMP error happened, WEM configure the setting continuously except for error items. In this case, WEM will notify to user with error dialog window.

Setting 1) Go to ‘Configuration’  ‘Controller/Device’ or ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Devices’. 2) I check the cluster which you’d like to comprise automatically in the Tree Viewer appeared in a left, and click the right of mouse in the concerned cluster group and select a menu. 3) Select ‘Cluster AutoConfig’ of the menu. 4) I confirm warning that the existing cluster creation is altogether deleted. 5) Select ‘Yes’ button.

2.4.4 Remove Cluster Auto Configuration To release cluster, Each Controllers has to release cluster member information. By using WEM, Operator can release cluster member information to each controllers automatically. If using this function, each controller will be lost previous cluster information. So, operator should plan this activity because it will affect the current service. During the auto configuration, if SNMP error happened, WEM configure the setting continuously except for error items. In this case, WEM will notify to user with error dialog window.

Setting 1) Go to ‘Configuration’  ‘Controller’ or ‘Monitor’  ‘Devices’. 2) I check the cluster which you’d like to lift automatically in the Tree Viewer appeared in a left, and click the right of mouse in the concerned cluster group and open a menu. 3) Select ‘Cluster Auto Clear’ of the menu. 4) Confirm warning that the existing clusters creation is altogether deleted. 5) Select ‘Yes’ button.

2.4.5 Switch Nodes A switch belonging to a group node or cluster in the tree viewer can be directly configured.

Creating a Switch 1) Right-click in the tree viewer group.

2) Select ‘Switch Register’ in the popup menu.

3) The menu window where the switch can be created appears.

Figure 17. Switch Registration Menu Window

4) Set each field depending on entries. The registration process status in ‘Ready’ on the bottom of the window can be confirmed.

Item Description

GROUP Group to which a switch node belongs-Impossible to modify NAME Name of the switch TYPE Designate the type of a switch (iES4028FP, iES4226FP, iES4250GP, iES4028F, iES4224GP, iES4024GP, General) IP ADDRESS IP address of a switch GET COMMUNITY Designate SNMP community for viewing the switch. SET COMMUNITY Designate SNMP community for setting the switch.

Item Description

SNMP PORT SNMP port number of a controller SNMP VER Supported version of SNMP-Impossible to modify

5) Click the ‘Add’ button.

6) The switch added can be confirmed in the tree viewer.

Deleting a Switch 1) Select a switch to delete in the tree viewer and then right-click. 2) Select ‘Switch Deletion’ in the popup menu. 3) The window for asking the deletion of the switch appears.

Figure 18. Window for Confirming Switch Deletion

Automatic AP configuration Automatic AP configuration is a function of automatically creating the information on the connection between the Ethernet port of the switch and the AP which is connected to the port by using the information on RFC1213 and bridge MIB (RFC1213). By using this function, the operator can easily create the information on the switch port and the AP connected therewith.

1) Select a switch to process the automatic AP configuration in the tree viewer and then right-click.

2) Select ‘Automatic AP Configuration’ in the popup menu.

3) The window for asking the automatic AP configuration appears.

Figure 19. Window for Confirming Automatic AP Configuration

4) Click ‘Yes’ to perform the automatic AP configuration.

5) The result of the automatic AP configuration can be confirmed by viewing the concerned switch information in Configuration Management.

Figure 20. Screen for Information on Configuration between Switch and AP

CHAPTER 3. Monitor

This chapter describes how to use the monitoring function of the WEM.

The ‘Monitor’ menu can be distinguished as follows:  Alarms  Controller/Device  AP  Stations  Report  RF Map  Dashboard  Topology  Security  RRM  WIPS  DPI

3.1 Alarms 3.1.1 Current Alarms The ‘Current Alarms’ displays on a ‘Event Viewer’ window where the real time events received through a server.

Execution Result Table

Figure 21. Current Alarm Window

The parameters for Current Alarm are as follows:

Parameter Description

Severity Alarm Grade - Critical: Critical Faults - Major: Major Faults - Minor: Minor Faults Code Displays the Alarm Code Group Alarm Group - system: The alarm that are generated in the APC. - ap: The alarm that are generated in the AP. - wifi: Alarm related Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) - security: Alarm related security - network: Alarm related network - etc.: etc Environment? Location Displays the location where the alarm occurred. Probable Cause Displays the cause of the alarm.

Parameter Description

Ack User Displays which user acknowledge the Alarm. Alarm Time Displays the Alarm occurred time. Clear Time Displays the Alarm cleared time. Clear Type Displays how the Alarm was cleared(Auto/Manual).

Viewing and Setting Alarm Filter (Condition) The system supports the setting to display only the specific events using alarm filtering. Click the ‘Condition button ( )’ at the top of the Current Alarm window to select the criteria of the event you wish to display.

Figure 22. Current Alarm (Condition Dialog)

Viewing the Current Alarms 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Alarm’  ‘Current Alarms’. 2) Click ‘Refresh’ button to retrieve alarm information. 3) The search results will be displayed in the result table. 4) Click ‘Save’ button ( ) to save the results. Saves the alarm information in a window to an Excel file. 5) Click ‘Print’ button ( ) to print the results.

3.1.2 Alarm History The ‘Alarm History’ menu allows viewing and modifying the fault information saved in the database.

The parameters of the alarm history are as follows:

Parameter Description Severity Alarm Grade - Critical: Critical Faults - Major: Major Faults - Minor: Minor Faults Clear Type Displays how the Alarm was cleared. (Auto/Manual) Code Displays the Alarm Code Group Alarm Group - system: The alarm that are generated in the Controller. - ap: The alarm that are generated in the AP. - wifi: Alarm related Wi-Fi - security: Alarm related security - network: Alarm related network - etc.: etc Location Displays the Location where the alarm occurred. Probable Cause Displays the cause of the alarm. Ack User Displays which user acknowledge the alarm. Alarm Time Displays the alarm occurred time. Clear Time Displays the alarm cleared time. Alarm Duration (Sec.) The period of the total time from the time an alarm had occurred to the time it was cleared. Additional text The additional information of the alarm.

Retrieving the Alarm History (Event History)-Post Alarm History Window 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Alarm’  ‘Alarm History’ menu. 2) On the Tree Viewer of the main window, select the NEs for which you want to view the Alarm history. The selected NEs are displayed in the Target field. If you select All, then all the errors of the system including EMS errors are displayed. If you want to view EMS errors only, then select the ‘EMS event only’ option. 3) Set the search conditions.  Select the search period in the ‘Period’ field, which allows user to search with in specific Date and Time.  User can select Alarm, Status, Fault or All in the ‘Event Type’ field. If you select Alarm, you can select a value in the ‘Severity’, ‘Group’, ‘Ack’, ‘Clear’, and ‘Code’ field to specify the searching conditions. If you select ‘Status’ or ‘Fault’, the ‘Severity’, ‘Group’, ‘Ack’, ‘Clear’, and ‘Code’ values are not used as the searching conditions. If you select all in the Event type field, all messages will be displayed.

 Select a type of alarm group in ‘Group’.  Select an alarm code in ‘Code’.  Select fault recognition and release in ‘Ack’ and ‘Clear’. 4) Click ‘Search’ button. 5) The search results will be displayed in the result table. 6) Click the ‘Save’ button to save the result.

Ack/Unack Alarms 1) After viewing the alarm history, select the alarms that you want to acknowledge in the results table 2) Click ‘Ack’ button. 3) Check whether the selected alarms have been acknowledged in the ‘No.’ column of the results table. 4) If you want to unacknowledged alarms, select them in the results table and click ‘Unack’.

Clear Alarm 1) After viewing the alarm history, select the alarm that you want to ack. 2) Click ‘Clear’ button. 3) Check whether the selected alarms have been cleared in the background color of the ‘Severity’ column and the ‘ClearTime’ column of the results table.

3.2 Controller/Device 3.2.1 Summarized Controller/Device Information When WEM in the tree viewer is selected while ‘Monitoring’  ‘Controller/Device’ has been selected, the summarized information on all controllers that the WEM now manages is provided in a form of table. If a specific cluster or controller group is selected instead of WEM, the summarized information on the controller belonging to the group can be viewed.

Figure 23. Summarized Controller Information Window

The description on the summarized controller information is as follows:

Item Description

WEC A link immediately accessing WEB GUI of the controller. Click the icon and then immediately move to the WEB GUI login screen of the controller. Name Name of the controller IP Address IP address of the controller MAC Address MAC address of the controller Model Controller Models - WEC8500 - WEC8050 Connection Status Connection status between WEM and the controller - Normal - Abnormal AP Counts Total number of APs connected to the controller Station Counts Total number of stations connected to the controller * There may be any difference between the real time information and the recent 5-minute information stored in WEM DB.

3.2.2 Detailed Information on Controller If you select a specific controller in the tree viewer while having selected ‘Monitoring’  ‘Controller/Device’ in the menu or click the name of the specific controller in the table of the summarized controller information, you can view the following information on the controller:  System  DHCP  Performance  Security  Radio

3.2.2.1 System This shows the information on the system, software, resource, environment, etc. of the controller through tables and graphs.

System Configuration Information_WEC8500 This illustrates the configuration of the controller and the status of each interface in a form of figure.

System LED Console MGMT 1 GbE Optic Port 10 GbE Optic Port

Figure 24. WEC8500 Configuration

LED for WEC8500 System

LED Status Description

SYS Green The system is normally operating. Red The system is ready for booting. FAN (Fan Module) Green The installed fan module is normally operating. Red The fan module has a fault. PS1 (Power Module 1) Green The installed power module 1 is normally operating Red While the power module 1 is installed, the power is off or a fault occurs. Off The power module 1 was not installed. PS2 (Power Module 2) Green The installed power module 2 is normally operating

LED Status Description

Red While the power module 2 is installed, the power is off or a fault occurs. Off The power module 2 was not installed.

WEC8500 Management Port For management, WEC8500 provides 1 GbE/100 base-T UTP port (RJ-45) and it works in the 10/100 Mbps half or full duplex mode or in the 1000 Mbps full duplex mode. Besides, WEC8500 that supports the automatic MDI/MDI-X function can use the straight-through cable to all network connections for PC, server, another switch or network hub.

WEC8500 Optical Port WEC8500 provides two 10 GbE optical ports and eight 1 GbE optical ports, each of which the status is displayed in LED.

Item Port & LED Description

10 GbE Port LINK/ACT 1, Indicates the status of LINK/ACT of each port. LINK/ACT 2 - Green turns on when the link is normally connected. - Red turns on when the link has a fault. - Turned off when it is down by the setting. 10G 1, 10G 2 10 GbE optical module connector 1 GbE Port LINK/ACT 1~ Indicates the status of LINK/ACT of each port. LINK/ACT 8 - Green turns on when the link is normally connected. - Red turns on when the link has a fault. - Turned off when it is down by the setting. 1G 1~1G 8 1 GbE optical module connector

System Configuration Information_WEC8050 This illustrates the configuration of the controller and the status of each interface in a form of figure.

System LED 1 GE port

Figure 25. WEC8050 Configuration

LED for WEC8050 System

LED Status Description

SYS Green The system is normally operating. Red The system is ready for booting. FAN (Fan Module) Green The installed fan module is normally operating. Red The fan module has a fault. PWR (Power) Green The installed power module is normally operating. Red While the power module is installed, the power is off or a fault occurs.

WEC8050 Optical Port WEC8050 provides four 1 GbE optical ports, each of which the operating status is displayed in LED.

Item Port & LED Description

1 GE port LINK/ACT 1~ Indicates the status of LINK/ACT of each port. LINK/ACT 4 - Green turns on when the link is normally connected. - Red turns on when the link has a fault. - Turned off when it is down by the setting. 1G 1~1G 4 1 GbE optical module connector

Resource/Environment Resource/environment information shows the information on the CPU load, memory usage, and disk usage history as shown in the figure below. When the general information screen is viewed for the first time, the information is not displayed. Execute the period setting icon on the right bottom of the graph and then and designate the period to display the information. By using the icon on the left bottom, it is possible to change in a form of table and it is also possible to store in a file (CSV format).

Period Setting Button

File Save Button

Table/Chart Selection Button

Figure 26. Resource/Environment Information

Temperature The temperature information shows the real-time information on the temperature sensor installed on the CPU and board of the controller (only for WEC8500 model; No temperature information provided for WEC8050 model).

Refresh Button

Figure 27. Controller Temperature Information

system information

Item Description

The name of the system Name of the controller Location Information Information on the location of equipment The model name. Equipment model name - WEC8500 - WEC8050 MAC address MAC address of the controller IP Address IP address of the controller interface set to connect with WEM Serial number Unique manufacturing number of the controller System Operating Time The operating time elapsing after the system runs System time Current system time

Software

Item Description

ACTIVE Version Information on the firmware version of the controller now working ACTIVE Date Information on the firmware build time of the controller now working STANDBY Version Information on the backup firmware version of the controller STANDBY Date Information on the backup firmware build time of the controller

Alarm

Item Description

CRITICAL Number of critical alarms of the controller MAJOR Number of major alarms of the controller MINOR Number of minor alarms of the controller

APs

Item Description

Total Total number of APs connected to the controller Activated Number of activated APs connected to the controller. Click the link and then move immediately to the AP list information window. Deactivated Number of deactivated APs connected to the controller. Click the link and then move immediately to the AP list information window.

Unauthorized APs

Item Description

Count Total counts of unauthorized APs detected in the controller

Connected Terminals

Item Description

Count Total number of terminals connected to the controller. Click the link and then immediately move to the station information window.

Port Provide the information on the setting and operating status of the optical ports and management ports embedded in the controller. Click the name of the linked port in blue to view the statistical information on the port.

Figure 28. Port Information

Item Description

NAME Port name ADMIN STATUS The configuration status of the port by the operator (up or down) LINK STATUS Actual operating status of the port (Green: Up, Red: Down) SWITCH PORT Configuration status of switch function (enabled/disabled) AUTO NEGO Configuration status of auto negotiation mode (enabled/disabled) PHYSICAL STATUS Link connection status (Speed: 10M, 100M, 1G, 10G, Transmission Mode: Full Duplex, Half Duplex)

3.2.2.2 DHCP Information 3.2.2.2.1 Lists Displays the DHCP information for wireless terminals.

The parameters of the DHCP List are as follows:

Parameter Description

MAC ADDRESS MAC address of wireless terminal for DHCP STATION IP ADDRESS IP address of wireless terminal for DHCP Server IP ADDRESS IP address for DHCP server LEASE DURATION Lease duration after DHCP connecting LEASE TIME DHCP lease time

Retrieve DHCP List 1) Select the AP Controller on the Tree Viewer which user wants to search. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘DHCP’  ‘Lists’ menu. 3) Displays DHCP information.

3.2.2.2.2 Statistics User can view the DHCP statistics.

The parameters of the DHCP statistics are as follows:

Parameter Description

BOOTP-REQUEST COUNTs Request packet count for BOOTP protocol BOOTP-INVALID COUNTs Invalid packet count of received BOOTP packet (Abnormal Format) The number of invalid packet of which format is abnormal among received BOOTP packet. BOOTP-RESPONSE COUNTs Response packet count for BOOTP protocol BOOTP-INVALID COUNTs The number of invalid packet in which there is no assigned (UNKNOWN STATIONs) lease among received BOOTP request packet. BOOTP-INVALID COUNTs The number of invalid packet which is the band in which the IP (NOT SERVING SUBNET) assign is not provided among the received BOOTP request packet. DHCP v4 DISCOVERS Received DHCPv4 DISCOVER packet count DHCP v4 INVALIDs (Abnormal Invalid packet count which is wrong format Format) DHCP v4 INVALIDs The number of invalid packet in which there is no assigned (UNKNOWN STATIONs) lease among received DHCPv4 request packet. DHCP v4 OFFERs DHCPv4 [OFFER] packet count

Parameter Description

DHCP v4 REQUEST COUNTs DHCPv4 [REQUEST] packet count DHCP v4 DECLINEs DHCPv4 [DECLINE] packet count DHCP v4 ACKs DHCPv4 [ACK] packet count DHCP v4 NAKs DHCPv4 [NACK] packet count DHCP v4 RELEASE DHCPv4 [RELEASE] packet count DHCP v4 INFORMs DHCPv4 [INFORM] packet count DHCP v4 INVALIDs (NOT The number of invalid packet which is the band in which the IP SERVING SUBNET) assign is not provided among the received DHCPv4 request packet.

3.2.2.3 Performance ‘Performance’ Management manages items that are related to the performance of controller.

The performance management refers to managing the items related to the performance of AP Controller. It provides the function to display the data of the performance for the controller in real time on the screen. It provides the function to save and print.

3.2.2.3.1 CPU Utilization WEM System monitors and retrieves CPU and Fan performance and Temperature in real time, user can view the result in graph/table format.

Retrieve CPU Performance 1) Select the AP Controller on the Tree Viewer which user wants to check. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Performance’  ‘CPU’ menu. 3) Select ‘CPU ID’ on left of the window. 4) Select checkbox of ‘CPU Usage’ item. 5) User can set the interval ‘Period’ in seconds [10, 20, 30 & 60] at the ‘Period’ field. 6) Click ‘Start’ button to start monitoring. Click ‘Stop’ button, to stop the real timer monitoring. 7) User has an option to change output display format by clicking ‘Graph’ or ‘Table’ tab button in the down-right window. 8) Click ‘Export’ button to save the output graph and table in a file.

Retrieving Fan Performance 1) Select the AP Controller on the Tree Viewer which user want to check. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Performance’  ‘FAN’ menu. 3) Select ‘FAN ID’ in the left window. 4) Select the checkbox of ‘Fan RPM Level’ Performance Maintenance. 5) User can set interval period in Seconds [10, 20, 30 & 60] at the ‘Period’ field.

6) Click ‘Start’ button to start monitoring. Click ‘Stop’ button, to stop the real-time monitoring. 7) User has an option to change output display format by clicking as ‘Graph’ or, ‘Table’ tab button in the down-right window. 8) Click ‘Export’ button to save the output graph and table in a file.

Retrieving Temperature 1) Select the AP Controller on the Tree Viewer which user want to check. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Performance’  ‘Temp’. 3) Select ‘Temp Sensor ID’ in the left window. 4) Select the checkbox of ‘Temperature’ performance metrics. 5) User can set interval period in Seconds [10, 20, 30 & 60] at the ‘Period’ field. 6) Click ‘Start’ button to start monitoring. Click ‘Stop’ button, to stop the real-time monitoring. 7) User has an option to change output display format by clicking as ‘Graph’ or ‘Table’ tab button in the down-right window. 8) Click ‘Export’ button to save the output graph and table in a file.

3.2.2.3.2 Memory Usage WEM System monitors and provides Memory usage in real time, user can view the result in graph/table format

Retrieve Memory Usage Performance 1) Select the AP Controller on the Tree Viewer which user wants to check. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Performance’  ‘Memory’ menu. 3) Select the checkbox items which user wants to measure the performance in the left side of the window. Each performance measure are as follows.  Memory Total Size (GB): Total memory size  Memory Used Size (GB): Used memory size  Memory Usage (%): Memory usage in percentage 4) User can set the interval ‘Period in Seconds [10, 20, 30 & 60] at the ‘Period’ field. 5) Click ‘Start’ button to start monitoring. Click ‘Stop’ button, to stop the current real time monitoring. 6) User has an option to change output display format by clicking ‘Graph’ or ‘Table’ tab button in the down-right window 7) Click ‘Export’ button to save the output graph and table in a file.

3.2.2.3.3 Disk Usage WEM system monitors and provides disk usage in real time; user can view the result in graph/table format.

Retrieve Disk Performance 1) Select the AP Controller on the Tree Viewer which user want to check. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Performance’  ‘Disk’ menu. 3) Select the checkbox items which user wants to measure the performance in the left side of the window. Each performance measure is as follows.  Disk Total Size (GB): total memory size  Disk Used Size (GB): used memory size  Disk Free Size (GB): free memory size  Disk Usage (%): memory usage in percentage 4) User can set interval period in Seconds [10, 20, 30 & 60] at the ‘Period’ field. 5) Click ‘Start’ button to start monitoring. Click ‘Stop’ button, to stop the real-time monitoring. 6) User has an option to change output display format by clicking as ‘Graph’ or, ‘Table’ tab button in the down-right window. 7) Click ‘Export’ button to save the output graph and table in a file.

3.2.2.3.4 Interface WEM System monitors and provides interface status of APC in real time, user can view the result in graph/table format.

Retrieving Interface Performance 1) Select the AP Controller on the Tree Viewer which user wants to check. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Performance’  ‘Interface’ menu. 3) Select ‘INTERFACE Name’ to the left of the window. 4) Select the checkbox items which user wants to measure the performance in the left side of the window. Each performance measure is as follows.  In Octets (Kbps): Received data octets count  In UcastPkts (Kbps): Received unicast packet count  In Discards (Kbps): Discarded packets count in received data.  In Errors (Kbps): Error packets count in the received data  In UnknownProtos (Kbps): Unknown packet count of the received data  Out Octets (Kbps): Transmitted data octets count.  Out UcastPkts (Kbps): Transmitted unicast packets count  Out Discards (Kbps): Discarded packets counts in transmitted data  Out Errors (Kbps): Error packets count in the transmitted data 5) User can set interval period in seconds [10, 20, 30 & 60] at the ‘Period’ field. 6) Click ‘Start’ button to start monitoring. Click ‘Stop’ button, to stop the real time monitoring. 7) User has an option to change output display format by clicking ‘Graph’ or ‘Table’ tab button in the down-right window. 8) Click ‘Export’ button to save the output graph and table in a file.

3.2.2.4 Security 3.2.2.4.1 Guest User Displays the security information of the Guest User registered in a controller on the screen.

Parameter Description

NAME Guest User Name START TIME Start Time for Guest User END TIME End Time for Guest User FULL NAME User Name for Guest User STATUS Status for Guest User (Enable, Disable) SPONSOR An Employee of the Organization GRANTOR Name of the Person who registered Guest User

Retrieve Security Information 1) Select the AC Controller on the Tree Viewer which user wants to search. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Guest User’ menu. 3) Displays ‘Guest User’ security information.

3.2.2.4.2 RADIUS Displays the RADIUS information for selected APC.

Parameter Description

ID ID for RADIUS server TYPE RADIUS Server type Authentication Accounting Authentication/Accounting IP ADDRESS RADIUS server IP address PORT RADIUS support port

Retrieving 1) Select the AC Controller on the Tree Viewer which user wants to search. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘RADIUS’ menu. 3) Displays the ‘RADIUS’ information.

3.2.2.4.3 TACACS+ Displays the TACACS+ information for selected APC.

Parameter Description

ID TACACS+ server ID IP address TACACS+ server IP Shared Key TACACS+ server shared key Port TACACS+ server port number (range: 1-65535, default: 49) Source IP address Source IP address of the TACACS+ message This must be one of the IP addresses configured in the W-EP WLAN system. Status Status of packet transmission to TACACS+ server (default: enable)

Retrieving 1) Select the AC Controller on the Tree Viewer which user wants to search. 2) Go to ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘TACACS+’ menu. 3) Displays the ‘TACACS+’ information.

3.2.2.5 Radio The controller settings for wireless standards IEEE 802.11a/n/ac and IEEE 802.11b/g/n can be retrieved in this section.

Select the AP Controller on the Tree Viewer which user wants to check 802.11 information. Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘802.11a/n/ac’ or ‘802.11b/g/n’.

The parameters for IEEE 802.11a/n/ac and IEEE 802.11b/g/n are as follows:

IEEE 802.11a/n/ac [Parameter]

Parameter Description

RTS THRESHOLD RTS (Request To Send) threshold SHORT RETRY Short retry limit to the number of times LONG RETRY Long retry limit to the number of times FRAGMENTATION THRESHOLD Fragmentation threshold TX MSDU LIFE TIME Tx MSDU (MAC Service Data Unit) valid time RX MSDU LIFE TIME Rx MSDU valid time

[802.11h]

Parameter Description

POWER CONSTRAINT Tx Power Limit CHANNEL SWITCH ENABLE Channel switch availability CHANNEL SWITCH MODE Channel switch mode CHANNEL SWITCH COUNTS The number of channel switches

IEEE 802.11b/g/n [Parameter]

Parameter Description

RTS THRESHOLD RTS threshold SHORT RETRY Short retry limit to the number of times LONG RETRY Long retry limit to the number of times FRAGMENTATION THRESHOLD Fragmentation threshold TX MSDU LIFE TIME Tx MSDU (MAC Service Data Unit) valid time RX MSDU LIFE TIME Rx MSDU valid time

3.3 AP 3.3.1 Summarized AP Information From the Summarized AP Information menu, the list of all APs registered now in the WEM and the summarized information by AP can be viewed. The summarized AP information screen is as shown below.

Figure 29. Summarized Information Screen

Each item on the summarized AP information screen is as shown below.

Item Description

Link Test Provide a function of testing whether the physical link between the AP and the controller works normally. Click the hyperlink and then the ping test for the selected AP is conducted by the controller and the test result is displayed on the pop-up screen in the WEM. Name Provide a hyperlink function to the detailed information window for a specific AP as the information on the name of the AP. IP Address IP address of the AP WAN interface MAC Address Physical address of the AP WAN interface Controller A controller to which an AP is registered Location Info As hyperlink information for the location on the RF map of the AP. Click the link to immediately move to the concerned RF map. Mode AP operation mode - General AP: Basic AP mode for user services - Root AP: A backbone AP for the repeater service. The wireless terminal is connected to the repeater AP and then the wired network via the root AP. - Repeater AP: As an edge AP for repeater service, the AP actually

Item Description

connected by the wireless terminal. - Sniffer AP: An AP which does not provide a user service but provides a function of capturing a packet in an air section packet (If the AP mode is a sniffer AP, establish the client IP address.) - Relay AP: An AP connecting the repeater AP with the root AP wirelessly Admin Status Information on the operator configuration status for the operation of the AP (Up, Down) Operating Status Information on actual operating status of the AP (Up, Down) Ethernet Speed Current speed of the AP (MBPS) Ethernet Duplex Duplex info of the AP 5 GHz channel Information on 5 GHz channel in use by the AP 2.4 GHz channel Information on 2.4 GHz channel in use by the AP Radio Base MAC Information on the base MAC address allocated to the WLAN interface Model AP model name No. of Connected The number of wireless terminals connected to the AP. Provide hyperlink Terminals and move to the screen on the list of the concerned terminal information when the information is clicked. Spectrum Analysis As a hyperlink to operate the spectrum analysis function for the wireless environment near the AP. Click the link and then move to ‘Tool’  ‘Spectrum Analysis’ screen.

Viewing 1) Go to ‘Monitoring’  ‘AP’ menu. 2) The list of registered APs is displayed on the screen.

Information on Number of APs Information on the number of APs is provided on the left upper position of the Summarized AP Information screen. If the condition to be viewed is changed by the setting of the condition for viewing, the information on the number of APs is changed.

Setting Number of List Lines of APs per Page Use the Setting Number of APs per Page button on the right upper position of the Summarized AP Information screen to set the number of APs to be displayed per one page. The range is adjustable between 10 and 100.

Figure 30. Screen of Setting Number of List Lines of APs per Page

Specifying Search Conditions Click the Specifying Search Conditions button ( ) on the Summarized AP Information screen to view information on only APs you want. The search conditions below can be set.  Name of the controller  AP mode  Configuration status  Operating status  Ethernet Speed(MBPS)  Ethernet Duplex

Figure 31. Screen on Specifying Search Conditions

Storing Summarized Information When you click the ‘Save’ button ( ) on the right top in the screen on Summarized AP Information, you can store the summarized information on the currently searched APs in a CSV file.

Link Test When you click the hyperlink on the link test items of the screen on Summarized AP Information, you can conduct the link test for the AP.

Figure 32. Link Test Screen

Map Location Information It provides the hyperlink that can switch the list of APs on the screen on Summarized AP Information to the RF Map screen of the AP. For more information on the function, refer to the ‘RF Map’ in Chapter 3.

Spectrum Analysis In the list of APs on the screen on Summarized AP Information, the hyperlink to execute the AP spectrum analysis immediately is provided. For more information on the function, refer to the ‘Spectrum Analysis’ in Chapter 6.

3.3.2 Detailed Information on AP The detailed information on AP provides information on the configuration of the AP, software, operation, radio, and performance in details.

3.3.2.1 System Viewing 1) Go to ‘Monitoring’  ‘AP’ menu. 2) The list of registered APs is displayed on the screen. 3) Click the hyperlink in the ‘Name’ column of the AP you want to view in the list of APs. 4) The detailed information on the selected AP is displayed on the screen.

[Traffic] The information on the history of AP traffic means the information on the data traffic sent and received through the WAN interface of the AP. History information is shown through the graphic or table and the history of the traffic history of the period you want by providing the setting of the viewing period may be viewed. In addition, if the file is required to be stored, it is possible to click the Save button to store the history of the viewed traffic in the file format of CSV.

Period Setting Button File Save Button

Table/Chart Selection Button

Figure 33. Traffic History Information

[CPU] The information on the history of CPU of the AP shows the history of the CPU load of the AP by using the graph and the table. It is possible to view the history of the CPU load in the period you want to view by providing the setting of the viewing period, and if it is necessary to save the file, click the Save button and then the viewed history of the CPU load may be stored in a file format of CSV.

Period Setting Button File Save Button

Table/Chart Selection Button

Figure 34. CPU Load History Information

[Map Location] If the AP is registered on the RF MAP, the location of the AP is indicated on the RF MAP.

Figure 35. Map Location

[Configuration]

Item Description

Name of AP Name of AP (Possible to change in Configuration Management) Group Name The name of AP group where the AP is included AP Mode AP operation mode - General: Basic AP mode for user services - Root AP: A backbone AP for the repeater service. The wireless terminal is connected to the repeater AP and then the wired network via the root AP. - Repeater AP: As an edge AP for repeater service, the AP actually connected by the wireless terminal. - Sniffer AP: An AP which does not provide a user service but provides a function of capturing a packet in an air section packet (If the AP mode is a sniffer AP, establish the client IP address.) - Relay AP: An AP connecting the repeater AP with the root AP wirelessly MAC Address Physical address of the AP WAN interface Map Location As hyperlink information for the location on the RF map of the AP. Click the link to immediately move to the concerned RF map. Location Necessary to explain the location of the equipment and to be configured by the operator Country The configuration status of the country where the equipment is made APC-AP Country Setting Country setting agreement between the AP and the controller (Matched, Mismatched) Environment Equipment installation environment - Both - Outdoor - Indoor - Non-country Echo Interval (sec.) The keep-alive interval of the CAPWAP session between AP and controller Maximum Discovery Interval The maximum waiting time before AP starts controller discovery (sec.) Reporting Interval (sec.) Interval at which the statistical information on WiFi decryption error is reported Statistical Interval (sec.) Interval at which the WiFi statistical information is reported Retransmission interval (sec) The first retransmission interval of the CAPWAP control packet Maximum Retransmission Maximum retransmission count of the CAPWAP control packet Echo Retransmission Interval The retransmission interval of the CAPWAP keep-alive packet (sec.)

Item Description

Maximum Echo Maximum retransmission count of the CAPWAP keep-alive Retransmission packet Configuration Status Information on the operator configuration status for the operation of the AP (Up, Down) Telnet Use of Telnet (Enabled, Disabled) SSH Use of SSH (Secure Shell) (Enabled, Disabled) VLAN Supported VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) supported (Enabled, Disabled) NATIVE VLAN ID Native VLAN ID information Name of the First Controller Name of the first controller where the AP is registered Name of the Second Name of the second controller where the AP is registered Controller Name of the Third Controller Name of the third controller where the AP is registered

[Software]

Item Description

Active Software Version The activated software package version Boost Version System boot image version

[Information]

Item Description

Model Model number Serial Number Serial manufacturing number of AP AP local IP Address IP address of the AP WAN interface Operating Status Information on actual operating status of the AP (Up, Down) CAPWAP Status Operating Status of CAPWAP link - IDLE: CAPWAP session is disconnected - DTLS: DTLS connection is made between AP and the controller - JOIN: A step of the AP starting the access to the controller - CONFIG: A step of the AP bringing the configuration information from the controller - DATA CHECK: A step of confirming the connection status of the CAPWAP data channel between AP and the controller - RUN: CAPWAP connection has been completed. - IMAGE: During the access of the AP to the controller, AP is being upgraded. Radio Status 5 GHz Information on the status of the 5 GHz radio (Up, Down) Radio Status 2.4 GHz Information on the status of the 2.4 GHz radio (Up, Down)

Item Description

Up Time The elapsed time after the AP has been booted CAPWAP Up Time The elapsed time after CAPWAP link is connected RADIO Limited Number Limited number of available radio Number of Radio in Use Number of radio in use Discovery Type Discovery type Management IP Address IP address used for management Cause of Reboot Reason for AP rebooted latest Last Connection Time Last connection time of AP Spectrum Analysis Hyperlink with spectrum analysis Link Test AP link test hyperlink

3.3.2.2 Radio Viewing 1) Go to ‘Monitoring’  ‘AP’ menu. 2) The list of registered APs is displayed on the screen. 3) Click the hyperlink in the ‘Name’ column of the AP you want to view in the list of APs. 4) The detailed information on the selected AP is displayed on the screen. 5) Select the Radio menu in the Detailed AP Information screen. 6) The radio information on the AP is displayed on the screen.

Real-time Channel Usage-802.11a/n/ac, 802.11b/g/n This shows the usage of all channels, not of the radio channel now in use, in real time by using the graph. The real time information is not automatically updated and if you want to update, click the Update button on the right bottom of the graph to view the real time information again.

Refresh Button

Figure 36. Real Time Channel Usage

Real-time Air Quality-802.11a/n/ac, 802.11b/g/n This shows the air quality of all channels, not of the radio channel now in use, in real time by using the graph. The real time information is not automatically updated and if you want to update, click the Update button on the right bottom of the graph to view the real time information again.

Refresh Button

Figure 37. Real Time Air Quality

Channel Usage-802.11a/n/ac, 802.11b/g/n This shows the history of the usage of the channel used in the AP through the graph and the table. The section of the history information may be configured by clicking the Setting of the Viewing Period on the right bottom of the graph.

Period Setting Button File Save Button

Table/Chart Selection Button

Figure 38. History of Channel Usage

Air Quality-802.11a/n/ac, 802.11b/g/n This shows the history of the air quality of the channel used in the AP through the graph and the table. The section of the history information may be configured by clicking the Setting of the Viewing Period on the right bottom of the graph.

Period Setting Button File Save Button

Table/Chart Selection Button

Figure 39. History of Air Quality

Traffic-802.11a/n/ac, 802.11b/g/n The information on the history of AP radio traffic means the information on the history of data traffic sent and received through the radio interface of the AP. History information is shown through the graphic or table and the history of the traffic history of the period you want by providing the setting of the viewing period may be viewed. In addition, if the file is required to be stored, it is possible to click the Save button to store the history of the viewed traffic in the file format of CSV.

Period Setting Button File Save Button

Table/Chart Selection Button

Figure 40. History of Radio Traffic

Radio Information-802.11a/n/ac

Item Description

5 GHz Channel Real-time channel information of 5 GHz radio 5 GHz Transmission Power Real-time transmission power of 5 GHz radio 5 GHz Channel Usage (%) Real-time channel usage of 5 GHz radio 5 GHz Air Quality (%) Real-time air quality of 5 GHz radio

Radio Information-802.11b/g/n

Item Description

2.4 GHz Channel Real-time channel information of 2.4 GHz radio 2.4 GHz Transmission Power Real-time transmission power of 2.4 GHz radio 2.4 GHz Channel Usage (%) Real-time usage of the channel of 2.4 GHz radio now in use 2.4 GHz Air Quality (%) Real-time air quality of 2.4 GHz radio now in use

List of Neighboring APs-802.11a/n/ac, 802.11b/g/n

Item Description

Name of Neighboring AP The name of the neighboring AP detected by the AP viewed MAC Address The MAC address of the neighboring AP Radio MAC Address The radio base MAC address of the neighboring AP Channel The radio channel in use by the neighboring AP Transmission Power The transmission power value of neighboring AP RSSI (dBm) The transmission power value of the neighboring AP detected by the AP being viewed

3.3.2.3 Performance It shows the performance information of the WAN and WLAN interface of the AP in real time in a form of graph or table.

Viewing Interface Performance 1) Go to ‘Monitoring’  ‘AP’ menu. 2) The list of registered APs is displayed on the screen. 3) Click the hyperlink in the ‘Name’ column of the AP you want to view in the list of APs. 4) The detailed information on the selected AP is displayed on the screen. 5) Select the performance menu in the Detailed AP Information screen. 6) The performance information on the AP is displayed on the screen. 7) Select ‘Interface Name; you want to see the performance information in the left of the window displayed. 8) Select the item you want to display among the performance measuring items in a

checkbox. Each performance measuring item is as follows:  In Discards: Discarded packets among received ones  In Errors: Error packets among received ones  In NUcastPkts: Non-unicast packets received  In Octets (Bytes): Data octet received  In UcastPkts: Unicast packets received  In Unknown Protos: Packets that do not know protocols among received ones  Out Discards: Discarded packets among sent ones  Out Errors (Kbps): Error packets among sent ones  Out NUcastPkts: Non-Unicast packets sent  Out Octets (Bytes): Data octet sent  Out UcastPkts: Unicast packets sent 9) Select the viewing interval in the ‘Interval’. 10) To start monitoring, click the ‘Start’ button. If it has been already worked, click the ‘Stop’ button to stop the real time display. 11) Select the tab button on the ‘Graph’ and ‘Table’ on the left bottom of the window to change the screen display form. 12) Click the ‘Save’ button to store the displayed graph or table in a file.

3.4 Station The information on the wireless terminal (station) managed by the WEM is displayed. The summarized screen illustrates the list of all stations that are possible to view. The detailed information by station may be viewed by clicking the hyperlink in the MAC address.

3.4.1 Summarized Station Information The information on all wireless terminals possible to view in the WEM can be viewed.

Station List

Data Rate Traffic

Figure 41. Summarized Station Information Screen

Viewing 1) Go to ‘Monitoring’  ‘Station’ menu. 2) The summarized station information screen is displayed.

Information on Number of Stations Information on the number of stations is provided on the left upper position of the Summarized Station Information screen. If the condition to be viewed is changed by the setting of the condition for viewing, the information on the number of stations is changed.

Setting Number of List Lines of Stations per Page Use the Setting Number of stations per Page button on the right upper position of the Summarized Station Information screen to set the number of stations to be displayed per one page. The range is adjustable between 10 and 100.

Figure 42. Screen on Setting Number of List Lines of Stations per Page

Specifying Search Conditions Click the Specifying Search Conditions button ( ) on the Summarized Station Information screen to view information on only stations you want. The search conditions below can be set.  Name of the controller  Name of AP  AP MAC address  User name.  SSID  Station MAC address  Station OS type  Connection status

Figure 43. Screen on Specifying Search Conditions

Storing When you click the ‘Save’ button ( ) on the right top in the screen on Summarized Station Information, you can store the list of the currently searched stations in a CSV file.

List of Stations The list of stations is displayed on the top of the screen on Summarized Station Information and the description is as follows:

Item Description

Trouble Shooting Hyperlink to take the status test of the station MAC Address Station MAC address User Name Name of the station user IP Address Connected IP address used by a station Name of AP Name of AP to which the station now connects or last connected AP MAC MAC name of AP to which the station now connects or last connected Name of Controller Name of the controller connected to the AP to which the station now connects or last connected MAC of Controller Name of the MAC of the controller connected to the AP to which the station now connects or last connected SSID Name of SSID to which the station now connects or last connected Channel Radio channel used when the station is connected Authentication The method for authentication used when the station is connected Encryption The method for encryption used when the station is connected VLAN VLAN ID to which the station is connected Protocol Radio protocol used when the station is connected (2.4 GHz/5 GHz) Status Connection status of station Recent Connection Time Time when the station is connected last Term Time when the station is kept connected last Map Location Hyperlink on the location of the station on RF Map. Click it to immediately move to the map to display the location of the station. Operating System Operating system of the station (Android, iOS, etc.) Transmission Rate Data rate while the station is last connected

Traffic The traffic information on the Summarized Station Information screen is the information on the history of total amount of traffic used by the selected stations under the conditions in the list of stations on the top. It is provided in a form of graph or table and the information on the history of station traffic during the period you want to view according to the setting of the viewing period can be viewed.

Figure 44. Total Amount of Station Traffic

Data Transmission Rate The disconnection distribution of the stations by data transmission rate is displayed.

Figure 45. Station Distribution by Data Transmission Rate

3.4.2 Detailed Station Information Viewing 1) Go to ‘Monitoring’  ‘Station’ menu. 2) The summarized station information screen is displayed. 3) Click the hyperlink of the MAC address of the station you want to view in the list of stations on the screen for summarized station information. 4) The detailed station information screen is displayed. 5) To return to the Summarized Station Information screen, click the ‘Back’ button on the right top.

Station Information

Item Description

MAC Address Station MAC address User Name Name of the station user IP Address Connected IP address used by a station VLAN ID VLAN ID to which the station is connected Dynamic VLAN Status of configuring dynamic VLAN (Yes or No) Data Transmission Rate Supported Data transmission rate supportable by the station Guest Existence of a guest (Yes or No) SSID Name of SSID to which the station now connects or lastly connected Protocol Radio protocol used when the station is connected (2.4 GHz/ 5 GHz) Channel Radio channel used when the station is connected RSSI (dBm) Real time RSSI value of the station SNR SNR value of Station Data Transmission Rate Data transmission rate now connected NCHO Mode Type of service mode of AirMove (APP/STATION) Handover Type Type of handover: 802.11 HO (Station Controlled), AirMove (Network Controlled) Reason for Handover Reason for handover (Assoc, Reassoc, etc.) Cluster Roll Station roll upon the handover of Intercontroller L3 Cluster Anchor IP Address IP address of the anchor roll controller upon the handover of Intercontroller L3 Cluster Foreign IP Address IP address of the foreign roll controller upon the handover of Intercontroller L3 Connection Time Time when the station is connected last Status Various status of the station Performance Performance of the station

Controller/AP Information

Item Description

Name of Controller Name of the controller connected to the AP to which the station now connects or lastly connected IP Address of Controller IP address of the controller connected to the AP to which the station now connects or lastly connected Name of AP Name of AP to which the station now connects or lastly connected AP IP Address IP address of the AP connected by the station AP MAC Address MAC address of AP to which the station now connects or lastly connected AP Mode Mode of AP to which the station now connects or lastly connected AP Operating Status Currently operating status of AP to which the station now connects or lastly connected (Up/Down) AP Map Location The location of the AP to which the station now connects or lastly connected on RF map Branch Local Authentication Support of branch local authentication (Yes or No) WLAN ID WLAN ID BSSID WLAN service IP in a specific AP QoS Allocation QoS allocation

Security information

Item Description

Authentication Mode The method for authentication used when the station is connected Encryption Algorithm The method for encryption used when the station is connected EAP Type Type of EAP ACL Application Status Application of access control to station (Yes or No) ACL Name Name of the access control applied to the station AAA ACL Application Status Application of AAA ACL AAA ACL Name Name of the applied AAA ACL Guest ACL Name Name of the applied guest ACL HTTP Redirect URL HTTP redirect URL (guest service) HTTP Redirect HTTP redirect on Radius Authentication Server IP Radius authentication server IP address Address Radius Accounting Server IP Radius accounting server IP address Address

Traffic Usage The station provides the information on the history of used traffic in a graph or table. The viewing period is set by clicking the period setting icon on the right bottom of the graph.

Figure 46. Station Traffic Usage

RSSI/SNR The RSSI and SNR station history is shown in a graph and a table. The retrieval period is set by clicking on the period setup icon at the bottom right of the graph.

Figure 47. Stattion Traffic Usage and Station RSSI/SNR

History of Connection of Station The function of viewing the history of the connection of the station is provided. You can click the period setting icon on the top of the screen on the list of connection history to set the period of viewing the connection history.

Figure 48. History of Connection of Station

Item Description

User Name Name of the station user IP Address Connected IP address used by the station Controller Name Name of the controller connected to the AP to which the station is connected AP Name Name of the AP to which the station was connected Map Location Location where the station was placed on the map SSID SSID with which the station was connected Channel Channel number used when the station was connected Protocol Connected protocol used when the station was connected (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz) Connection Time Time when the station was connected Connection Ending Time Time when the station released the connection Term (sec.) Time when the station is kept connected Traffic (Byte) Total traffic used during the time when the station is connected Reason for Handover Cause for the station performing handover Authentication Time Time when the station received authentication IP Allocation Time Time when the IP was allocated if the station was connected RSSI (dBm) RSSI value just before the station released the connection SNR SNR value just before the station ends the connection

Using Trouble Shooting 1) Select a station to which you want for troubleshooting in the list of stations and click the hyperlink on the troubleshooting column of the station. 2) Request the WEM to perform troubleshooting for the station. 3) The controller performs troubleshooting and delivers the result to the WEM. 4) Display the result of performing the troubleshooting in the WEM.

[Station Status]

Item Description

Connection The status on which the wireless terminal is connected to the AP (OK, NOK) Authentication The status on which the wireless terminal is authenticated to the AP (OK, NOK) IP Allocation IP allocation information for the wireless terminal to be connected with AP PING Check the communication with the wireless terminal (ping).

[AP Status]

Item Description

Name of AP Name of the AP to which the station is connected at the time that the station troubleshooting is performed MAC Address Radio MAC address of the AP to which the station is connected at the time that the station troubleshooting is performed Radio Status 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz operating status AP operation status CAPWAP status (Run, Down, Idle)

[Station Event] The history of events occurring in relation to the station is displayed. It is useful only when the controller turns on the station event notification option.

Figure 49. Station Troubleshooting

3.5 Report WEM system allows user to generate statistics reports from the database. The following reports can be gathered from WEM.  Alarm  Station  Controller  AP  Security  Network Quality  Guest User

Output results will be saved in PDF (Portable Document Format) or CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.

The parameters for the statistics are as follows:

Parameter Description

REPORT TITLE Report title REPORT TYPE Report type SCHEDULED The schedule application condition NEXT SCHEDULED RUN The next statistics report fulfillment time LAST RUN The time when the statistical report is performed lastly STATUS The available condition HISTORY I output the career putting the statistical report into practice. RUN NOW I put the selected statistical report into practice and output to a screen in the form of PDF/CSV.

3.5.1 Alarm Using the alarm information collected in the WEM, alarm-related statistical data are outputted in the form of a file.

Generating Alarm Statistics 1) Select the ‘Monitoring’  ‘Reports’  ‘Alarms’ menu.

2) Click on Generate Report among the statistical menu items shown ( ).

3) The settings window appears, which allows you to add statistical items to include in the report.

4) Enter a title in the settings window.

5) Select a controller for which to generate a report.

6) Specify the alarm conditions-severity of alarms, events, replies, cleared, etc.-to include in the report.

Figure 50. Speicify the Alarm Conditions

7) Specify an alarm period to include in the report.

8) If you want to use scheduled reporting, select Schedule setting and turn on the schedule.

Figure 51. Specify the Report Schedule

9) Configure custom settings as required.

10) Select a Run option to start generating a report.

[Report Setting field]

Parameter Description

Title Report title Controller Target devices (controller) Alarm Severity Select this check box if you want to collect statistics (critical, major, minor) Event Fault and Status Select this check box if you want to collect statistics Ack/Unack Select this check box if you want to collect statistics Clear/Unclear Select this check box if you want to collect statistics Period Period Setting Customize Change of the output field.

[Schedule Setting field]

Parameter Description

Scheduling Scheduling tasks File Format Select the file format (CSV/PDF) Start Date Start Time End Date End Time Recurrence Generation interval

[Excute Setting field]

Parameter Description

Save Save the current configuration Save and Run Run statistics data collection and save data in CSV or PDF file format Run Now Run statistics data collection now File Save Save statistics data in CSV or PDF file format Cancel Cancel current configuration

3.5.2 Station Using station-related information collected in the WEM, the statistical data of wireless devices are outputted in the forms of a file according to the period and conditions specified by the operator.

Generating Station Statistics Follow the steps below to generate station-related statistical data.

1) Select the ‘Monitoring’  ‘Reports’  ‘Stations’ menu.

2) Click on Generate Report among the statistical menu items shown ( ).

3) The settings window appears, which allows you to add statistical items to include in the report.

4) Enter a title in the settings window.

5) In the Type section, select a detailed report option.  Busiest Station: Generates a statistical report of the station with the most traffic according to the selected report setting option.  Station Counts: Generates a statistical report of station counts according to the selected report setting option.

 Station Traffic: Generates a statistical report of station traffic according to the selected report setting option.  Station Sessions: Generates a statistical report of station session information according to the selected report setting option.  Station Summary: Generates a station summary statistical report according to the selected report setting option.

6) In the Options section, select Controller or SSID.

7) In the Protocol section, select the protocols of stations to include in the report.

Figure 52. Generate the Station Report

8) In the Retrieval count section, specify the number of stations to retrieve.

9) In the Period section, specify a period to include in the report.

10) If you want to use scheduled reporting, select Schedule setting and turn on the schedule.

11) Configure custom settings as required.

12) Select a Run option to start generating a report.

[Report Setting field]

Parameter Description

Title Report title Type Report Type Criteria Controller/SSID Protocol IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11n (5 GHz), IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n (2.4 GHz) Retrieval Count Specify a number of additional stations to retrieve (when Busiest Station is selected) Period Period Setting Customize Change of the output field.

3.5.3 Controller Using controller-related information collected in the WEM, controller statistical data are outputted in the form of a file according to conditions specified by the operator.

Generating Controller Statistics Follow the steps below to generate controller-related statistical data.

1) Select the ‘Monitoring’  ‘Reports’  ‘Controller’ menu.

2) Click on Generate Report among the statistical menu items shown ( ).

3) The settings window appears, which allows you to add statistical items to include in the report.

4) Enter a title in the settings window.

5) In the Type section, select a detailed report option.  Controller Summary: Generates a controller summary statistical report according to the selected report setting option.  Controller Resource: Generates a statistical report of controller resources according to the selected report setting option.  Controller Interface: Generates a statistical report of controller interface according to the selected report setting option.

6) In the Options section, select a controller.

Figure 53. Generate the Controller Report

7) If you want to use scheduled reporting, select Schedule setting and turn on the schedule.

8) Configure custom settings as required.

9) Select a Run option to start generating a report.

[Report Settings]

Item Description

Title Report title Type Report type Controller Name of the specified controller Schedule Setting Enables scheduled generation of reports Custom settings Allows use of custom output fields in the report

3.5.4 AP Using AP-related information collected in the WEM, AP statistical data are outputted in the form of a file according to conditions specified by the operator.

Generating AP Statistics Follow the steps below to generate AP-related statistical data.

1) Select the ‘Monitoring’  ‘Reports’  ‘APs’ menu.

2) Click on Generate Report among the statistical menu items shown ( ).

3) The settings window appears, which allows you to add statistical items to include in the report.

4) Enter a title in the settings window.

5) In the Type section, select a detailed report option.  AP Summary: Generates an AP summary statistical report according to the selected report setting option.  AP Usage: Generates a statistical report of AP usage according to the selected report setting option.  Air Quality: Generates a statistical report of air quality according to the selected report setting option.  Channel Utilization: Generates a statistical report of AP channel utilization according to the selected report setting option.  AP Resource: Generates a statistical report of AP resource usage utilization according to the selected report setting option.  AP Interface: Generates a statistical report of AP interface performance according to the selected report setting option.  Busiest APs: Generates a statistical report of the APs with the most traffic according to the selected report setting option.  AP Uptime: Generates a statistical report of AP uptime according to the selected report setting option.

6) In the Options section, select Controller, SSID, or AP/radio.

Figure 54. Generate AP Report

7) If you want to use scheduled reporting, select Schedule setting and turn on the schedule.

8) Configure custom settings as required.

9) Select a Run option to start generating a report.

[Report Settings]

Item Description

Title Report title Type Report type Controller Name of the specified controller, SSID or AP/radio Retrieval Count Specify a number of additional APs to retrieve (when Busiest APs is selected) Period Period for which to generate the report Schedule Setting Enables scheduled generation of reports Custom settings Allows use of custom output fields in the report

3.5.5 Security Using rogue AP-related information and interferer-related information collected in the WEM, rogue AP statistical data and interferer statistical data are outputted in the form of a file according to conditions specified by the operator.

Generating Rogue AP Statistics Follow the steps below to generate rogue AP-related statistical data.

1) Select the ‘Monitoring’  ‘Reports’  ‘Security’ menu.

2) Click on Generate Report among the statistical menu items shown ( ).

3) The settings window appears, which allows you to add statistical items to include in the report.

4) Enter a title in the settings window.

5) In the Options section, select a controller.

6) Select ‘Rogue APs’ for Type.

Figure 55. Generate Rogue AP Report

7) Select a Class Type.

8) In the Period section, specify a period to include in the report.

9) If you want to use scheduled reporting, select Schedule setting and turn on the schedule.

10) Configure custom settings as required.

11) Select a Run option to start generating a report.

[Report Settings]

Item Description

Title Report title Controller Name of the specified controller Type Type of report to generate (Rogue APs, Interferers) Class Type Type of rogue APs to include in the report - Unclassified - Non-malicious - Malicious Period Period for which to generate the report Schedule Setting Enables scheduled generation of reports Custom settings Allows use of custom output fields in the report

Generating Interferer Statistics Follow the steps below to generate interferer-related statistical data.

1) Select the ‘Monitoring’  ‘Reports’  ‘Security’ menu.

2) Click on Generate Report among the statistical menu items shown ( ).

Figure 56. Generate Interferer Report

3) The settings window appears, which allows you to add statistical items to include in the report.

4) Enter a title in the settings window.

5) In the Options section, select a controller.

6) Select ‘Interferers’ for Type.

7) In the Options section, select an interferer type.

8) In the Period section, specify a period to include in the report.

9) If you want to use scheduled reporting, select Schedule setting and turn on the schedule.

10) Configure custom settings as required.

11) Select a Run option to start generating a report.

[Report Settings]

Item Description

Title Report title Controller Name of the specified controller Type Type of report to generate (Rogue APs, Interferers) Interferer Type Specifies a type of interferer Period Period for which to generate the report Schedule Setting Enables scheduled generation of reports Custom settings Allows use of custom output fields in the report

3.5.6 Network Quality Using call-related information collected in the WEM, call statistical data are outputted in the form of a file according to conditions specified by the operator.

Generating Network Quality Statistics Follow the steps below to generate network quality related statistical data.

1) Select the ‘Monitoring’  ‘Reports’  ‘Network Quality’ menu.

2) Click on Generate Report among the statistical menu items shown ( ).

3) The settings window appears, which allows you to add statistical items to include in the report.

4) Enter a title in the settings window.

Figure 57. Generate Network Quality Report

5) Select a report type.  Call Statistic: Provides statistical data concerning call success rate, drop rate, etc.  Handover Latency: Provides statistical data concerning handover delay time  Handover Failure: Provides statistical data concerning handover failure  Association Latency: Provides statistical data concerning connection delay time  Association Failure: Provides statistical data concerning connection failure  Packet Loss: Provides statistical data concerning the packet loss rate

6) In the Options section, select Controller, AP/radio, SSID-a specific device type.

7) If selecting a specific device, the OS version of the device must also be selected.

8) In the Period section, specify a period to include in the report.

9) If you want to use scheduled reporting, select Schedule setting and turn on the schedule.

10) Configure custom settings as required.

11) Select a Run option to start generating a report.

[Report Settings]

Item Description

Title Report title Type Specifies a type of report Options Generate statistics for the selected controller, AP/radio, SSID or device OS Version Specifies the OS version when a terminal has been selected and the statistics that are to be generated for a particular terminal Period Period for which to generate the report Schedule Setting Enables scheduled generation of reports Custom Settings Allows use of custom output fields in the report

3.5.7 Guest Users Using guest user related information collected in the WEM, guest user statistical data are outputted in the form of a file according to conditions specified by the operator.

Generating Guest User Statistics Follow the steps below to generate guest user related statistical data.

1) Select the ‘Monitoring’  ‘Reports’  ‘Guest Users’ menu. 2) Click on Generate Report among the statistical menu items shown ( ). 3) The settings window appears, which allows you to add statistical items to include in the report. 4) Enter a title in the settings window. 5) In the Options section, select a controller. 6) Select a report type.  Guest Summary  Guest Session 7) In the Period section, specify a period to include in the report. 8) If you want to use scheduled reporting, select Schedule setting and turn on the schedule. 9) Configure custom settings as required. 10) Select a Run option to start generating a report.

[Report Settings]

Item Description

Title Report title Controller Name of the specified controller Type Specifies a type of report

Item Description

Period Period for which to generate the report Schedule Setting Enables scheduled generation of reports Custom Settings Allows use of custom output fields in the report

3.5.8 Integrated Report It reports the overview relating to the WEM, including the number of users, data usage, number of sessions, session time, present status by OS and device type, etc.

Creating Integrated Report To create an integrated report, execute the following:

1) Select ‘Monitoring’  ‘Report’  ‘Integrated Report’ menu.

2) Click the Create Report ( ) in the statistical menu on the screen.

3) The setup window that may add statistical items appears.

4) Enter the title in the setup window.

Figure 58. Creating Integrated Report

5) Select items to be included in the report.  Client Count by SSID: Number of maximum concurrent users, average number of users, and graph of changes by time by SSID  Client Usage by SSID: Maximum data usage and average data usage (at the interval of 5 min.), and graph of changes by time by SSID  Client Count and Usage by AP Group: Number of maximum concurrent users, average number of users, maximum data usage, average data usage, and graph of changes by time by SSID of each AP group  Client Session Summary: Information on total session count, client count and data usage  Session Data by Connection Mode: Client count, data usage, total session time, and number of sessions by connection mode (radio)  OS Summary: Number of users and data usage by OS  Device Type Summary: Number of users by device type  Session Data by OS: Number of users, data usage, total session time, and number of sessions by OS  Session Data by Device Type: Number of users, data usage, total session time, and number of sessions by device type  Session Data by SSID: Number of users, data usage, total session time, and number of sessions by SSID

 Most Utilized AP Group by Maximum Concurrent Count: Sorts based on the number of concurrent users in a unit of AP group. Displays the number of users and data usage.  Most Utilized AP Group by Maximum Usage: Sorts based on data usage in a unit of AP group. Displays the number of users and data usage.  Most Utilized by Maximum Concurrent Count: Sorts based on the number of concurrent users in a unit of AP. Displays the number of users and data usage.  Most Utilized by Maximum Usage: Sorts based on data usage in a unit of AP. Displays the number of users and data usage.

6) Set the period to be included in the report in the period item.

7) If the reservation is required to be executed, select the schedule setting and set the schedule.

8) Select an APC or AP Group to be included in the report.

9) Selec the execution option and execute the report creation.

[Report Settings]

Item Description

Title Report title Type Selects items to be included in the report. Carteria Selects statistics for APC or AP Group Period Period for which a report is created Controller List Selects the APC to be included when a report is prepared. Schedule Setting Sets the report to operate fit for the reservation time.

3.6 RF Map WEM provides a map overlay of operator entire network with real-time, visual network status indicators. Use the RF Map feature to place Wireless devices on a static map that are located in closed spaces such as buildings and offices. Use the built in map location tool to create a geographic view of your network and placement of your wireless devices and link status can quickly be determined to color coded icons. User can plot current or historic information such as link SNR, traffic load and other metrics to evaluate network health and manage bottlenecks ‘RF Map’ view consists of the configuration view on the left, the right side of the tool bar and main view is classified.

Configuration View Tool Bar

Main View

Figure 59. RF Map Window

Configuration View The configuration view consists of ‘Map Tree View’, ‘Floor Setting’, and ‘Display’ menu.  Map Tree View: It has Root View option which shows all the types of views in hierarchical structure. There are three types of Views i) Campus View ii) Building View iii) Floor View.  Floor Setting: Consists of AP, AP Heat maps, Interferer, Station, Rogue AP & Rogue Station functions. Each option has different functions.  Display: Consists of Name, MAC Address, IP Address, Tx Power, ‘Channel’, Channel Utilization, Air Quality Controller IP and Alarms options.

Tool Bar Tool bar is used in accordance with the main view.

Main View Main view window displays all the views in aligned manner, user can click on the each items in Map View Tree to get desired view.

Order wise configuration to be followed, like Root  Campus view  Building

view  floor view. In other words, user cannot create Campus or building from floor view.

3.6.1 Root View The WEM provides to see all views type at a glance in the main window. All content comes under root option as a tree and links between each view. When user click root button, the system displays list of all view types with count of Total AP, Stations, Radio Types & Alarms information on each types. A default output of the RF Map Layout is Root View.

Tool bar

Figure 60. Root View Window

Root View provides the tool bar is as follows.

Button Description

Provides a search function.

Add Campus

Searching Search option allow user to search contents (name and view types) in the RF Map layout. Two buttons are available to support search contents to move forward and back [Previous’ button ( ) and the ‘Next’ button ( )].When user type alphabet in the search field, the text color changes to RED or BLUE. Blue texts denote search item available in the list and Red texts denotes search item not available in the list.

[Blue: Search Item available in the list]

[Red: Search Item not available in the list]

The information provided in the main view is as follows:

Item Description

Name Name of campus, building and floor view Category Types of view - CampusView - BuildingView - FloorView All APs Number of APs existing in the view Station Number of stations existing in the view 5 GHz Number of 5 GHz radio existing in the view 2.4 GHz Number of 2.4 GHz radio existing in the view Alarm Number of active faults occurring in the view

3.6.2 Campus View The ‘Campus View’ is the most basic step in the RF-MAP Viewer. The screen output is as follows:

Tool Bar

Figure 61. Campus View Window

Add Campus 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) Click ‘Add Campus’ button ( ) in the main window. 3) Enter the campus name in the ‘Campus Name’ field, and enter a description in the ‘Description’ field, corresponding to campus. 4) Click OK button, A Pop up message displayed for successfully added Campus view.

The screen must be manufactured in order of Root View  Campus View  Building View  Floor View. In short, while the campus or building view is not made, the floor cannot be immediately created.

Move among all views is allowed only in the execution mode. While moving, you must check whether it is in the execution mode before clicking the required object button. In the edit mode, only the editing of the object is provided.

View from the campus to provide the tool bar, described as follows.

Button Description

Campus view of the screen zoom in and out

Change mode ‘Execute/Modify’

‘Execute/Modify’ on the tool bar is a toggle button between two modes. When user click Modify button the following items appear on top of the window.

Button Description

Add building object

Add background image/Change the background wallpaper of the

current campus view Delete the currently visible screen of Campus view

Save current output image screen

Save all

Refresh

To zoom in and out of campus view Campus view screen supports zoom in and zoom out functions, which can be viewed by ‘%’ of unit. User can see ‘+’, ‘-’ button in the combo box and use the ‘%’ screen to zoom in and ‘%’ screen to zoom out Min % Zoom in is 50 % and Max % Zoom out is 400 %. (floor view supports the same features.) When user saves Campus view screen in Zoom in or out mode, the result of saved image size will be normal as 100 % view.

Delete Campus To delete the campus, all buildings registered on the screen must be deleted first. If you execute without deletion, a pop-up window of asking whether you will continue with the warning sentence that buildings exist now in the campus appears. At the time, if you select ‘OK’, the campus and buildings are all deleted.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) Select Campus from Map View Tree on the left side of the screen. 3) Click the ‘Modify’ button, change the editing mode. 4) Click ‘Delete Campus’ button at the top of campus view. 5) Click ‘OK’ button to delete the campus object.

Create Building Object in Campus View User has an option to add building in the campus. The building must be created as an object in the campus view.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) Select a Campus view to create building object in the left side of the Map Tree View. 3) Click the ‘Modify’ button, to change the editing mode 4) Click ‘Add Building’ button ( ) at the top of campus view, the following window appears. Click the ‘Modify’ button, change the editing mode. 5) Enter Building Name in ‘Building Name’ Field, enter corresponding information in ‘Floors’ and ‘Basements’ fields. 6) Click ‘OK’ button to create building object.

After building object creation completed, user can see the building appears on the Campus View

Figure 62. Building on the campus view object is created the appearance

Modify building object User can modify/delete the building object. Procedure is given below

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) On the left side of the ‘Map Tree View’, select the Campus view. 3) Select the building view object, which user want to delete from the campus view, press right click button on the building object. 4) A drop down menu appears. 5) Select ‘Change Information’ in the pop-up menu 6) The following modify window appears. 7) Enter the information to modify, click ‘OK’ button.

Delete Building Object WEM system does not provide shortcut button to delete building object on the tool bar for prevent user to delete the building object mistakenly

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) On the left side of the ‘Map Tree View’, select the Campus view. 3) Select the building view object, which user want to delete from the campus view, press right click button on the building object. 4) A drop down menu appears. 5) In the menu, select ‘Delete Object’. 6) The following confirmation message window appears to confirm. 7) Click ‘OK’ button to delete the building object.

Add/Change Background Image in Campus View User has an option to add/change background image for the campus view using shortcut button on the tool bar.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) Select Campus view from Map View Tree on the left side of the screen. 3) Click the ‘Modify’ button, change the editing mode. 4) Click ‘Add Background Image’ ( ) button at the top of campus view. 5) As shown below, allowing you to select an image file in Windows. 6) When you click on the ‘Open’ button after you select an image file in local location, the background image is added/changed. Do not add/change a random image file, request user to change the proper background image data for WEM server to reflect in proper display.

Save Campus view screen User can save the current output screen of the Campus view as an image.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) Select Campus view from Map View Tree on the left side of the screen. 3) Click the ‘Modify’ button, change the editing mode. 4) Click ‘Save Image’ ( ) button at the top of campus view. 5) Specify the location and filename you want to save the image and click the ‘Save’ button. Click ‘Save’ button.

Screen image is saved as follows:

Figure 63. Current Window

Figure 64. Saved screen image

3.6.3 Building View Building view is tied into one list to manage multiple floors (floor). Therefore, when the first building view does not seem anything.

The tool bar provides from the building view are as follows:

Button Description

Add floor

Show floor APs

Add a Floor 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’.

2) Select building view to add floor object from Map View Tree on the left side of the screen.

3) Click ‘Add Floor’ ( ) button at the top of campus view. The following window appears.

4) Enter each field, depending on the input parameters.

Parameter Description

Floor Name Floor name Floors Select the floor number which user want to add (Select Range: B2~6) Description Enter the current Description to create the floor from Building view. Horizontal Span Specifies the horizontal size of the actual corresponding layer. (Unit: cm) Vertical Span Specify the actual vertical size of the corresponding layer. (Unit: cm)

5) Click ‘OK’ button.

6) When the process is complete, go to view of the floor, as shown below, and double- click on the appropriate floor to register floor in the building view.

Figure 65. Floor View Resisted Window

Show AP on Floor Summary Window User can identify the AP location on the Floor View instead of going in to each floor and waiting to load data, this probably saves time for user. If user wants to see full view & more AP information, then user can select on each floor and get the brief information.

1) Select Monitor  ‘RF Map’. 2) Select Building view from Map View Tree on the left side screen 3) Click ‘Show AP’ ( )button at the top of building view. 4) AP position will be displayed on the floor image.

3.6.4 Floor View Floor View shows the AP Location on the floor image, the output screen as shown below.

Figure 66. Floor View Window

The description of Tool bar are as follows:

Button Description

Floor View Zoom in and Zoom out

Frequency bandwidth (2.4 GHz/5 GHz) Change mode ‘Execute/Modify’

Signal Level Color reference Save current output image screen

Refresh

‘Execute/Modify’ on the tool bar is a toggle button between two modes. When user click Modify button the following items appear on top of the window

Button Description

Modify Floor Information

Add AP

Add background image for current floor view

Button Description

Delete Floor

The current screen is saved in a database server

Planning mode

Refresh

Floor View to Zoon In and Out Floor view screen supports zoom in and zoom out functions, which can be viewed by ‘%’ of unit. User can see ‘+’, ‘-’ button in the combo box and use the ‘%’ screen to zoom in and ‘%’ screen to zoom out. Min % Zoom in is 50 % and Max % Zoom out is 400 %.

Add AP 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’.

2) Select Floor view from Map View Tree on the left side of the screen

3) Click the ‘Modify’ button, to change the editing mode.

4) Click ‘Add AP’ ( ) button at the top of floor view. The window which is including the following information appears.

Item Description

Select Button for selecting an AP AP Name Name of the AP MAC Address MAC address of AP IP Address IP address of AP AP Model Model name of AP

5) Double-click the AP you want to register or select with the select button and click the ‘OK’ button. The AP registered in the current floor view does not appear in the AP select screen. (APs cannot be registered at the same time in several floors.)

6) When AP registration is completed, the heat map area of the registered AP, AP object, and present status of station appear on the map.

Figure 67. AP Object completed registration

Item Description

Heat Map To display Signal Level in colors relative to the corresponding AP. AP Shows AP object. - Run Mode: When you select AP, it shows detail information of AP - Editing Mode: Support features such as drag-and-drop/delete of AP object Station Display the wireless terminals registered in the corresponding AP. Go to the Details screen when select the wireless terminal.

Deleting AP Object WEM system does not provide shortcut button to delete AP object on the tool bar for prevent user to delete the object mistakenly Instead of that user may select the delete option in the drop down menu.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’ menu. 2) Select Floor from Map View Tree on the left side of the screen. 3) Click the ‘Modify’ button, to change the editing mode. 4) Select the AP objects to delete from the Floor view, press right click button. 5) A Pop-up menu display. Select ‘Remove AP’ in the pop-up menu. 6) A pop up message window appears to confirm, Click ‘Ok’ button to delete AP object. 7) Click the ‘Save’ button to store the modification and click the Execute button to change the mode to the execution mode.

Retrieving AP Detailed Information Display the detailed information for selected AP.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) Select floor view at the Map View Tree. 3) Select AP object at the Floor view, and right-click on it. 4) Select ‘AP Detail Information’ in the pop-up menu. 5) It goes to ‘Monitor’  ‘Devices’  ‘System’  ‘General’ screen, it displays the detailed information.

Change Background image of Floor View 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) Select floor at the Map View Tree. 3) Click the ‘Modify’ button, to change the editing mode. 4) Click ‘Add Background Image’ ( ) button at the top of floor view. 5) When you click on the ‘Open’ button after you select an image file in local location, the background image is changed. When the change on the background screen is requested, the image data will be reflected immediately to the server. Therefore, a person other than the operator shall not change the image file arbitrarily.

Deleting Floor To delete the floor, all APs registered on the screen must be deleted first. If you execute without deletion, a pop-up window of asking whether you will continue with the warning sentence. At the time, if you select ‘OK’, the floors are all deleted.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) Select Floor view from Map View Tree on the left side of the screen. 3) Click the ‘Modify’ button, to change the editing mode. 4) Click on delete floor button on the tool bar. A warning message appears to confirm delete with AP objects 5) Click ok to delete

Floor View Screen Save User can save the current output screen of the floor view as an image.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’. 2) Select Floor view from Map View Tree on the left side of the screen. 3) Click ‘Save Image’ ( ) button in the top of Floor view. 4) Specify the location and filename you want to save the image and click the ‘Save’ button. 5) Screen image saved does not take into the account of screen expanded/collapsed state of the saved screen image.

Setting Floor View User can place objects and set parameters for AP on the floor view according to the needs, such as hide or show Floor Setting items and AP parameters.  Floor Setting: AP, AP Heat Maps, Station, Interferer, Rogue AP & Rogue stations  Display Parameter for AP: Name. Mac Address, IP Address, Tx Power, Channel, Channel Utilization, Air Quality, Controller IP and Alarms.

Display Parameter User allows selecting display parameter items left side of the screen. If you choose the items, the information will display according to the parameters selected on the floor image.

Planning Mode Planning Mode function helps user to predict signal coverage on different type of obstacles. You can place a virtual AP and select obstacle type to predict signal coverage in that.

Clicking ‘Planning Mode’ button in tool bar, the window is changed to the planning mode.

Figure 68. Planning Mode Window

The description of Tool bar are as follows:

Button Description

Wall Type

- Thick Wall (-13) - Light Wall (-2) - Heavy Door (-15) - Light Door (-4) - Cubicle (-1) - Glass (-1.5) Load previous planning data

Add Virtual AP

The current screen is saved in database server

Start planning

Save planning data (AP, Wall location information)

Go back to the floor view mode

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RF Map’ menu. 2) Select the floor in ‘Map View Tree’ at the left window. 3) Click the ‘Modify’ ( ) button, to change the edit mode. 4) Click the ‘Planning Start ( )’ button at the top of floor window

Add Virtual AP 1) Click ‘Add Virtual’ ( ) button on tool bar to add virtual AP. 2) Click the left mouse button on Virtual AP to move AP location. 3) Right click on Virtual AP and Select ‘Setting’ in pop-up menu. 4) Enter the required fields, click ‘OK’ button.

Parameter Description

Name Virtual AP name 5 GHz Tx Power Set the Tx Power of 5 GHz. (Unit: dBm) 2.4 GHz Tx Power Set the Tx Power of 2.4 GHz. (Unit: dBm)

Remove Virtual AP ‘Remove Virtual AP’ provides in pop-up menu.

1) Select the Virtual AP to delete right-click on it. 2) Select the ‘Remove AP’ in the pop-up menu box.

Add Obstacle To add obstacle, click the ‘Wall Type’ icon on the Tool bar at top of the planning window.

1) Select the Wall Type ( ) in the drop down list and click on wall color to place obstacle in the floor image, to add obstacles. 2) Click right mouse button over the obstacles. 3) Select ‘Setting’ in the pop-up menu. 4) Enter required fields, click ‘OK’ button.

Parameter Description

Width Set the width of obstacles. Height Set the height of obstacles. Angle Set the angle of obstacles in MAP.

Remove Obstacle ‘Remove Obstacle’ provides in pop-up menu.

1) Select the obstacle to delete, Right click on it. 2) Select the ‘Remove Obstacle’ at the pop-up menu.

3.7 Dashboard In addition to the reports available under Monitor, the WEM dashboard Includes a dashboard view containing a number of dashboard reports by default. You can also add dashboard reports to the WEM, providing custom report views you want to make available on your WEM dashboard. The following Wireless dashboard reports can be added.

Dashboard of the initial screen is organized as follows

Figure 69. Dash Board Window

Dashboards provided by the content items are as follows.

Item Description

AP Uptime Top 5 The oldest AP information, top 5. All Controllers: CPU Utilization (%) CPU usage of the controller All Controllers: Memory Utilization (%) Memory usage of the controller Station Alarm Summary The alarm summary that are generated in the Station Station Count The total number of wireless terminal Station Distribution Ratio of the entire wireless terminal 802.11an and 802.11bg.Displays Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) types at the same time. Station Traffic Top 5 5 station information of which there are lots of traffic Equipment Distribution Information on the number of all APs, radios, station equipment managed in the WEM Current Status of Equipment Status information on controllers and APs managed by the WEM

Item Description

Rogue AP Count Rogue AP Count Interferer Count Interferer Count Station Total Count Station Total Count Station Traffic Traffic amount which occurs at the station. AP Count By SSID AP count by SSID Station Count By SSID Station count by SSID Call Statistics Information on the history of call number occurring by controller Packet Loss Information on the history of packet losses occurring by controller Assoc Delay Information on the history of station assoc delay statistics by controller Assoc Failure Rate Information on the history of station assoc failure rate by controller Handover Delay Information on the history of handover delay statistics by controller Handover Failure Rate Information on the history of handover failure rate by controller

Each content item screen are described as below:

Figure 70. Contents Window

Button Description

Refresh button: Refresh the result

Setting button: Set to perform functions of the content or the content of the refresh interval set

Button Description

Minimize button (-)/Maximize button (+): Content to minimize or maximize the output screen View Chart/View Table: Chart or table to switch the output screen

Chart/Table Zoom out: Expanded to a full-screen chart or table output

Data Output: Save the chart or table data displayed as CSV file.

When configuring single device Wireless dashboard reports, a single device must be selected.

Each dashboard report can be customized to fit your specific needs. From any dashboard report menu, click setting to open the configuration dialog.

Add Dashboard Tab User can add items to monitor and manage in the dashboard window.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Dashboard’. 2) Select ‘Add Tab’ menu at the top of the dashboard window. 3) Enter the tab name at the ‘Tab Name’ field. 4) ‘Select the contents you want to add in the Available Contents box, and then click the content where you want to move, using the ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ button. 5) Click the ‘Save’ button to save the setting.

Rename Dashboard Tab Name 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Dashboard’. 2) Dashboard window appears. Click the right mouse button at the top of the dashboard window, a pop-up menu appears on the screen. 3) Select the ‘rename tab’ item on the pop-up menu. 4) Enter the name to be changed in the ‘Tab Name’ item. 5) Clicking ‘Save’ button, save the settings.

Deleting Dashboard Tab 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Dashboard’ menu. 2) Dashboard window appears. Select the tap button and right click on it, a pop-up menu appears on the screen. (Or, select the delete icon on the tab.) 3) Select the ‘delete tab’ item on the pop-up menu. The confirmation window appears. 4) Click ‘Yes’ button to delete the selected tab.

Editing Content of the Dashboard Tab user can modify the item existing configuration.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Dashboard’ menu. 2) The dashboard window appears. Select ‘Edit Contents’ in the upper-left corner of the dashboard window. 3) Select the name of the tab you want to modify from the ‘Tab Name’. 4) To add an item, click the desired item from the ‘Available Contents’ after using the ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ button and specify the location where you want to add. To delete the existing item, select the item you want to delete in the ‘Left Contents’, and ‘Right Contents’ and then click on the ‘Remove’ button. 5) Click ‘Save’ button to save the settings.

3.8 Topology ‘Topology’ menu in WEM system belonging to the AP Controller device. it shows device information of APC also shows overview alarm status of the device. WEM allows user to arrange APC device in a graphical view in the main window. In addition, user can retrieve APC information (Device Name, Type and IP)

To open Topology view Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Topology’.

Figure 71. Topology Window

Icons Topology view of main frame displays network elements types and an alarm status. Each network element with the following icon is displayed, the operator can see the color of the current alarm status.

Category Normal (White) Disable Critical (Red) Major (Orange) Minor (Yellow)

Controller

WEM

Viewing Device Information When you click the icon of the device displayed on the screen by using the mouse, the information on ‘Device Name’, ‘Device Type’ and ‘Device IP’ is displayed in the Device Information window on the right top of the screen.

Refreshing Screen To refresh the information on the screen, click the Refresh View icon on the left bottom.

Zoom Control To zoom in and out the screen, the ‘Zoom Control’ menu can be used. When you click the ‘-’ button, the screen becomes zoomed in and when you click the ‘+’ button, the screen becomes zoomed out.

Degrees of Depth This is a function of deciding at how many steps the equipment could be displayed far from the currently selected equipment. When the depth is set to be the lowest, only the equipment directly connected with the currently selected equipment is displayed on the screen and when the depth increases at one more step, not only the equipment directly connected but also equipment connected through one equipment is displayed on the screen.

Topology view is displayed WEM startup screen.

3.9 Security 3.9.1 Interferer ‘Interferer’ menu provides to view and set interference object for APC.

The parameters of the interferer are as follows:

Parameter Description

AP NAME AP name detecting interferer MAC ADDRESS AP MAC address detecting interferer TIME Detecting time INTERFERER TYPE Interferer Type - Bluetooth: Bluetooth interface device - Microwave oven: microwave - Continuous Transmitter: The same frequency generating device - Cordless Phone: Wireless telephone - Video Camera: Video camera - Zigbee: Zigbee interface device RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) Received signal strength MIN FREQUENCY Minimum frequency MAX FREQUENCY Maximum frequency Name of Controller Name of the controller to which the AP detecting interference is connected Name of Detected AP Name of the AP detecting the interference source. Possible to move immediately to the AP information by using the hyperlink. Map Location Hyperlink that can immediately move to the location screen on the map of the interference source

Options are different Below is the procedure to detect interference.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Security’  ‘Interferer’ menu. 2) Select the search device (Controller, Controller Group or WEM) on the Tree Viewer. Displays the selected device at the ‘Target Node’ field. 3) Select the interferer type at the ‘INTERFERER TYPE’ field. 4) Select the search period at ‘RUN INTERVAL’ field. 5) Clicking ‘Run’ button, the result displays. Clicking ‘Stop’ to stop interferer.

3.9.2 Rogue AP The controller detects unauthorized APs and wireless terminals, and creates related alarms and logs. WEM provides to view rogue APs information using the search conditions.

The detected Rogue APs are classified as follows

Type Description

Detected AP An unknown AP that does not match the user-defined friendly or malicious rules. Friendly AP AP that is allowed to be used by an administrator among the detected unauthorized APs - Configures the friendly AP classification policy. - An administrator can classify a specific AP as a friendly AP manually among the detected unauthorized APs. Malicious AP AP that is not allowed to be used by an administrator among the detected unauthorized APs and AP that can be used maliciously - Configures the malicious AP classification policy. - An administrator can classify a specific AP as a malicious AP manually among the detected unauthorized APs.

The parameters for the Rogue AP are as follows:

Parameter Description

MAC ADDRESS MAC address TIME Detecting time CLASS TYPE Rogue AP type (Friendly/Malicious/Unclassified) SSID SSID information RAIDO Wireless bandwidth (802.11an/802.11bgn) CHANNEL Channel EVENT TYPE Event type (Rogue AP/Illegal Channel) CONTROLLER NAME Controller which detected the rogue AP DETECTED AP NAME Name of the detected rogue AP MAP LOCATION Hyperlink of the rogue AP’s map location

Detecting Rogue AP Below in the procedure to detect the unauthorized AP.

1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Security’  ‘Rogue AP’. 2) Set the search conditions.  At the ‘CONTROLLER’ field, select the controller.  At the ‘EVENT TYPE’ field, select the event type.  At the ‘CLASS TYPE’ field, select the unauthorized/friendly/malicious AP type.  At the ‘RADIO’ field, select the radio property.  At the ‘PERIOD’ field, select the search period. 3) Click ‘Search’ button. 4) The Rogue AP list is displayed in the result table.

3.9.3 Access Control List (ACL) The access control function provides the function of viewing the information on the station that is limited to access from the controller system through the condition search. Access Control List (ACL) information can be retrived from this section.

The access control function is classified depending on the classification policy as follows:

Classification Type Description

ACL A station limited by the ACL among the stations limited to access Prevented by APC A station prevented by APC Prevented by AP A station prevented by AP

The parameters for the access control are as follows:

Item Description

LOCATION Location where the access is denied PREVENTED STATION MAC address of the wireless terminal has been denied access to the network TIME Time when the access is denied CAUSE Reason why the access is denied

Retrieving Access Control List 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘Security’  ‘ACL’. 2) Set the search conditions.  At the ‘CONTROLLER’ field, select the controller.  Select the access control type (ACL/Prevented Client) at the ‘EVENT TYPE’ items.  Select the search period in the ‘PERIOD’ items. 3) Click ‘Search’ button. 4) The access control list will be displayed in the result table.

3.10 Remote Resource Management (RRM) The radio resource management menu provides the screen where the radio resource management statistics information provided by the remote resource management (RRM) of the system can be viewed.

The parameters for the RRM are as follows:

[RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT]

Item Description

Statistics Statistics (AP’s at Maximum Power (a/n, b/g/n) Value RRM ratio Statistics Total channel change count/Total Tx Power change count Last 24 Hours Last 24 Hours statistics Last 7 Days Last 7 Days statistics

[TX POWER CHANGE]

Item Description

CHANGE REASON Change reason. (Coverage Hole Detected/Coverage Hole Recovery/ Neighbor RSSI/No Neighbor AP/User Change/Other) 802.11 (a/n) Tx power changing count of Change Reason for 802.11 (a/n) protocol. 802.11 (b/g/n) Tx power changing count of Change Reason for 802.11 (b/g/n) protocol.

[CHANNEL CHANGE]

Item Description

CHANGE REASON Change reason. (Channel Allocation/Channel Invalid/Duty Cycle/ Channel Utilization/Radar Detected/User Change/Other) 802.11 (a/n) Channel changing count of Change Reason for 802.11 (a/n) protocol. 802.11 (b/g/n) Channel changing count of Change Reason for 802.11 (b/g/n) protocol.

Retrieving RRM 1) Select ‘Monitor’  ‘RRM’. 2) RRM ‘Tx power change’ and ‘channel change’ is shown in the ‘Last 24 Hours’ and ‘Last 7 Days’ after a while. 3) You can select and see the graph indication one among the ‘Last 24 Hours’ or ‘the Last 7 Days’. 4) User able to see statistics in table or graph format by clicking Table/Graph icon.

3.11 WIPS The WIPS as wireless IPS is operated as a separate server. The WEM can register WIPS servers separately operated and receive events from such servers. All events are related to IPS and the statistics of the events can be briefly checked. The whole screen of the WIPS menu is as shown below.

Figure 72. WIPS Screen

1) WIPS Server List: A list of WIPS servers registered in the WEM 2) Search Conditions: Event search conditions 3) Distribution: Event distribution (by significance and by category) 4) Event List

3.11.1 Registering WIPS Server To receive an IPS event from the WIPS, WIPS servers to interoperate with the WEM must be registered and the WEM must be registered even to the WIPS to interoperate with. The WIPS can register only one WEM, and two or more WIPS servers can be registered in the WEM. Registration can be completed by configuring SNMPv3 TRAP between the WEM and the WIPS. If you want to delete servers in the WIPS server list, select the servers and then press the ‘Delete’ button.

Figure 73. WIPS Server Addition

The items to enter upon registration are as follows:

Item Description

Name As the name of a WIPS server, a value to be distinguished by the operator IP address IP address of the WIPS server. Because a TRAP message is filtered based on the address, if two IP addresses are used for redundancy in the WIPS, it is necessary to check the IP address to be received by the WEM. Description As the explanation of a WIPS server, a value to be distinguished by the operator Trap Version SNMP version to be used by a TRAP message User Name As the name to be used upon the authentication of the TRAP message, it must be matched with the value set in the WIPS server. Authentication Algorithm As the authentication algorithm to be used upon the authentication of the TRAP message, it must be matched with the value set in the WIPS server. The authentication As the authentication password to be used upon the authentication of password the TRAP message, it must be matched with the value set in the WIPS server. Individual Algorithm As the algorithm to be used to encrypt the TRAP message, it must be matched with the value set in the WIPS server.

Item Description

Development Password As the password to be used to encrypt the TRAP message, it must be matched with the value set in the WIPS server.

3.11.2 Searching WIPS Event You can search an event received from the WIPS in the WEM and check the statistical result.

The condition items for search are as follows:

Item Description

Equipment Possible to select one of registered WIPS server list or all WIPS servers. Significance Possible to select one of Critical, Major, and Minor events to search or search all severities. Category Possible to select one by event category and search all categories. The types of categories are as follows: - System - Unauthorized APs - Flooding attack - Terminal management - Peer-to-Peer - Man in the Middle - Air Attack Tool - MAC Spoofing - RF interference source Date Selects a time section to retrieve.

A pie chart which shows distribution is as follows:

Item Description

Significance Displays event distribution (%) depending on significance. Category Displays event distribution (%) depending on category.

The list of events shows following items:

Item Description

Time Event occurring time Name of Equipment Name of the equipment where an event occurs Significance Event significance (Critical, Major, Minor) Category Event category (same as the category of the event search conditions)

Item Description

BSSID/STA MAC address of a device which generates an event Description Event description

3.12 DPI The DPI, as the abbreviation of deep packet inspection, shows the analysis of the application layer level of the data traffic. The DPI consists of five sub-menus: Summary, Wlans, Devices, Users, and Applications.

3.12.1 Summary The Summary menu shows the present status of overall data traffic in center of the applications. Below is the summary screen.

2) 3)

Figure 74. DPI-Summary1

5) 6)

Figure 75. DPI-Summary2

Explanation on each number of the summary screen is as follows:

1) Statistics Time: Select a statistics time section. 2) Application Usage Distribution: Pie chart of all application usage distribution 3) Application Top 5: The table sorted in order of applications which are most frequently used ‘Usage by WLAN,’ ‘Usage by Device,’ and ‘Usage by User (Top 5)’ below are shown based on the applications most frequently used at first but if a specific application is selected in Application Top 5, they are changed to based on the application. 4) Usage Situation of Top 3: It shows the change of most frequently used top 3 applications by time in a graph. 5) Usage by WLAN: It shows the usage of a specific application by WLAN. At first, it illustrates the most frequently used application and if the operator selects another application in ‘Application Top 5’, it illustrates the application. 6) Usage by Device: It shows the usage of a specific application by device. At first, it illustrates the most frequently used application and if the operator selects another application in ‘Application Top 5’, it illustrates the application. 7) Usage by User (Top 5): It shows Top 5 users of a specific application. At first, it illustrates the most frequently used application and if the operator selects another application in ‘Application Top 5’, it illustrates the application.

The items of usage by user (Top 5) are as follows:

Item Description

User ID User ID of the station MAC MAC of the station Controller Name of the controller registered by the station SSID Name of SSID used by the station USE KBYTE Data usage Usage Rate Usage rate of the user among the whole usage of the application

3.12.2 Wlans The Wlans menu shows the description of the applications used based on each Wlan. Below is the Wlans screen.

Figure 76. Main Screen of DPI-Wlans

In the usage by Wlan, Wlans are listed in order of usage and there are following items:

Item Description

Wlan Name of the Wlan Number of users Number of users by Wlan Use BYTE Data usage Usage Rate Usage rate by Wlan depending on whole data usage Application Count Number of applications used by each Wlan

If a specific Wlan is selected in the main screen of Wlans, you can see the detailed information on the use of applications of the Wlan. The screen is as shown below.

1) 2)

Figure 77. Detailed Screen of DPI-Wlans

Explanation on each number of the detailed screen of Wlan is as follows:

1) Application Usage Distribution: The distribution of usage of the Wlan by application 2) Application Top 5: Description on top 5 applications most frequently used in the Wlan 3) Usage Situation of Top 3: The changes of usage of top 3 applications most frequently used in the Wlan by time

3.12.3 Devices The Devices menu shows the description of the applications used based on each device. Below is the screen of devices.

Figure 78. Main Screen of DPI-Devices

In the usage by device, devices are listed in order of usage and there are following items:

Item Description

Device Device name Use BYTE Data usage Usage Rate Usage rate by device depending on whole data usage Application Count Number of applications used by each device

If a specific device is selected in the main screen of devices, you can see the detailed information on the use of applications of the device. The screen is as shown below.

1) 2)

Figure 79. Detailed Screen of DPI-Devices

Explanation on each number of the detailed screen of devices is as follows:

1) Application Usage Distribution: The distribution of usage of the device by application 2) Application Top 5: Description on top 5 applications most frequently used in the device 3) Usage Situation of Top 3: The changes of usage of top 3 applications most frequently used in the device by time

3.12.4 Users The Users menu shows the description of the applications used based on each user. Below is the screen of users.

Figure 80. Main Screen of DPI-Users

In the usage by user, users are listed in order of usage and there are following items:

Item Description

User ID User ID MAC User Device MAC Use Byte Data usage used by each user Usage Rate Ratio of usage of the user to total usage Application Count Number of applications used by the user

If a specific user is selected in the main screen of users, you can see the detailed information on the use of applications of the user. The screen is as shown below.

1) 2)

Figure 81. Detailed Screen of DPI-Users

Explanation on each number of the detailed screen of users is as follows:

1) Application Usage Distribution: The distribution of usage of the user by application 2) Application Top 5: Description on top 5 applications most frequently used by the user 3) Usage Situation of Top 3: The changes of usage of top 3 applications most frequently used by the user by time

3.12.5 Application The Application menu shows the description on the usage of each application. Below is the screen of the Application.

Figure 82. Main Screen of DPI-Application

In the usage by user, users are listed in order of usage and there are following items:

Item Description

Application Application name Number of users Number of users who use the application Use Byte Data usage used by each application Usage Rate Ratio of usage of the application to total usage

If a specific user is selected in the main screen of users, you can see the detailed information on the use of applications of the user. The screen is as shown below.

1) 2)

Figure 83. Detailed Screen of DPI-Application

Explanation on each number of the detailed screen of users is as follows:

1) Usage by WLAN: The distribution of usage by Wlan of the application 2) Usage by Device: The distribution of usage by device of the application 3) Usage Situation: Usage situation by time of the application 4) Usage by User (Top 5): Information on top 5 users in order of users who use the application most frequently

CHAPTER 4. Configuration

The configuration management is to view, change, add, and delete the information for each NE. By using the Configuration menu, you can view the current configuration and set up and control each NE This menu is classified into following items:  Controller/Device  AP  Mobility Group  Controller Template  AP Template  Security

4.1 Controller/Device While ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller’ has been selected, when WEM in the tree viewer is selected, the summarized information on all controllers that the WEM now manages is provided in a form of table. If a specific cluster or controller group is selected instead of WEM, the summarized information on the controller belonging to the group can be viewed.

Figure 84. Summarized Controller Information Screen (consider changing)

The description on the summarized controller information is as follows:

Item Description

WEC A link immediately accessing WEB GUI of the controller. Click the icon and then immediately move to the WEB GUI login screen of the controller. Name Name of the controller IP Address IP address of the controller MAC Address MAC address of the controller Model Controller Models - WEC8500 - WEC8050 Connection status Connection status between WEM and controller - Normal - Abnormal Number of APs Total number of APs connected to the controller Number of Terminals Total number of stations connected to the controller * There may be any difference between the real time information and the recent 5-minute information stored in WEM DB.

4.1.1 System 4.1.1.1 General The ‘General’ menu allows the configuration of general settings in relation to the controller.

This menu allows configuration/retrieval of the following settings.

[AP Management Information]

Item Description

IP address IP address for AP management Interface Interface info for AP management (only for retrieval)

[Repeater Service]

Item Description

Interface Group Interface group to use for repeater service Service Enables/disables repeater service

[SIP ALG]

Item Description

SIP ALG (VoIP AWARE) Activates or deactives the SIP ALG (VoIP AWARE) service. Sending CAC Limit Error Activates or deactivates the error response function. Response Message Detecting Long Time Call Activates or deactivates the long time call detection function. No Response Call-based Time Configures the reference time to process as no response call. (sec.) Long Time Connected Call-based Configures the reference time to determine as a long time Time (sec.) connected call. SIP Monitoring Port 1 Configures port 1 for monitoring SIP ALG. SIP Monitoring Port 2 Configures port 2 for monitoring SIP ALG. SIP Monitoring Port 3 Configures port 3 for monitoring SIP ALG. SIP Monitoring Port 4 Configures port 4 for monitoring SIP ALG. SIP Monitoring Port 5 Configures port 5 for monitoring SIP ALG.

[Voice Call Monitoring]

Item Description

Voice Quality Monitoring Enables/disables the system’s voice quality monitoring function Enhanced voice quality Enables/disables the system’s enhanced voice quality monitoring monitoring function

[Server Public Port]

Item Description

FTP Public Port Number Configures the FTP service public port. SFTP Public Port Number Configures the SFTP service public port. HTTP Public Port Number Configures the HTTP service public port. HTTPS Public Port Number Configures the HTTPS service public port.

Configuring Information 1) Select a controller to configure in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘System’  ‘General’ menu. 3) Configure the necessary settings. 4) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.1.2 Backup Controller The ‘Backup Controller’ menu allows configuration of a backup controller for the selected controller. Information on controllers can be entered in the controller pool and then can be selected to be included in the backup controller list.

The backup controller configuration screen consists of the following settings.

[Fallback Configuration]

Item Description

Service Enables/disables the fallback function Type Specifies whether to run the service at all times or only for a specific period Time Specifies a specific period for which the service is set to run Interval Fallback test interval

[Controller Pool]

Item Description

Controller Name Controller name Controller MAC Address MAC address of the controller

[Backup Controller List]

Item Description

Controller Name Controller name Controller MAC address MAC address of the controller IP address IP address to use when connecting to the AP Port Port address to use when connecting to the AP Public IP Address Public IP address for connecting to the AP if the controller is in a NAT environment Public Port Port address for connecting to the AP if the controller is in a NAT environment

Setup 1) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘System’  ‘Backup Controllers’ menu. 2) After configuring the fallback-related general settings, select the ‘Set’ button. 3) Click the ‘Add’ button in the Controller Pool to add a controller.

4) Select a type in the popup window. If entering manually, enter a controller name and its MAC address. If selecting from the controller list, select an item from the list. 5) Click the ‘Add’ button in the popup window to add a controller to the list. 6) Click the ‘Add’ button in the Backup Controller List to add a backup controller. 7) Enter all the information and click the ‘Add’ button in the popup window to add to the list.

4.1.1.3 mDNS Snooping General The mDNS Snooping General menu provides functions for using the mDNS snooping service.

The configuration items of the mDNS setup screen are as follows.

[mDNS Snooping General]

Item Description

mDNS Snooping Service mDNS snooping function (enable/disable)

[Service Database List]

Item Description

Service name Name of services to use in mDNS (AirPrint, AirTunes, AppleTv, etc.) Service string Strings used in service names (ipp.tcp, raop.tcp, airplay.tcp, etc.)

Configuring 1) Select the ‘Configure’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘System’  ‘mDNS Snooping General’ menu. 2) Enable/disable the mDNS snooping service and click the ‘Set’ button. 3) Click the ‘Add’ button on the service database list to add the service to the service database list. 4) In the popup window, enter a service name and a service string. 5) Click the ‘Set’ button in the popup window to add the setting to the list.

Deleting 1) Select the ‘Configure’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘System’  ‘mDNS Snooping General’ menu. 2) Select a database to delete from the service database list and click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the database.

4.1.1.4 mDNS Snooping Profile The mDNS Snooping Profile menu provides functions for using the services concerning mDNS snooping.

The configuration items of the mDNS profile screen are as follows.

[mDNS Snooping Profile]

Item Description

Profile name mDNS snooping profile name Service count Number of services registered in the profile

Configuring 1) Select the ‘Configure’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘System’  ‘mDNS Snooping Profile’ menu. 2) In mDNS Snooping Profile, click the 'Add' button. 3) Enter a profile name to use and click the 'Set' button. 4) Check that the specified profile is added to the mDNS snooping profile list. 5) Click on a snooping profile to use. 6) Select a service to configure from the popup menu. 5) Click the 'Add' button to add the setting to the list.

Deleting 1) Select the ‘Configure’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘System’  ‘mDNS Snooping Profile’ menu. 2) Select a profile to delete from the mDNS snooping profile list and click the 'Delete' button to delete the profile.

4.1.1.5 Configuration Synchronization This function allows automatic synchronization of service settings between multiple controllers. When service settings are changed on the master controller, the settings are automatically applied to the connected slave devices.

The following settings can be checked.

[Configuration Synchronization]

Item Description

Mode Configuration Sync Mode (None/‘Active/Active’)

When in Active/Active mode, the following settings can be checked.

[Synced Controller]

Item Description

ID Controller index Controller name Name of the controller IP address IP address of the controller Mode Configuration sync mode of the controller Role Role mode of the controller Connection status Connection status of the controller

When in Active/Active mode, the following settings are available.

[Synchronization Role]

Item Description

Mode Synchronization role mode (Master/Slave/Standalone)

Configuring 1) Select a controller to configure in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configure’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘System’  ‘Configuration Synchronization’ menu. 3) If the configuration synchronization mode is Active/Active, select a synchronization role mode. 4) Click the ‘Set’ button to apply.

4.1.1.6 Country The ‘Country’ menu allows configuration of a country code to be applied to the controller and transmission power editing for each country.

The following country settings are available.

[Preset Country Code]

Item Description

Default Country Code Specifies a country to apply to the controller Default Environment Specifies a controller operation environment (indoor, outdoor, both, non-country) Country Code #1-3 Specifies a country

Item Description

Environment #1-3 Specifies an environment Preset General Channels and Maximum Tx power level at 5 GHz per channel Maximum Transmission Level (5 GHz) Preset General Channels and Maximum Tx power level at 2.4 GHz per channel Maximum Transmission Level (2.4 GHz) All Preset Channels (5 GHz) All channels configured at 5 GHz All Preset Channels (2.4 GHz) All channels configured at 2.4 GHz

[Editing Country Code]

Item Description

Country Code Designates the country to be applied to the controller. Maximum Transmission Power Level Configures Maximum Tx power level at 5 GHz per at 5 GHz channel Maximum Transmission Power Level Configures Maximum Tx power level at 2.4 GHz per at 2.4 GHz channel

Setup 1) Select a controller to set up in Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘System’  ‘Country’ menu. 3) Set up the setup information items. 4) Click the ‘Set’ button to apply the country settings.

4.1.2 WLAN 4.1.2.1 Profile This menu allows the retrieval and configuration of WLAN profiles of registered devices.

The setup items are shown below:

[Profile]

Item Description

WLAN ID WLAN ID Name Profile name SSID Service set identifier Interface Group Name of the interface group

Item Description

Radio Frequency band (2.4 GHz/5 GHz) CAPWAP Tunnel Mode Configures a CAPWAP tunnel mode. SSID Hide Configures SSID hide. AAA Override Activates or deactivates the AAA override function. No. of Maximum UEs Connected Configures number of maximum UEs connected. AP Group List List of AP groups to which the WLAN is added

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘WLAN’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) WLAN profile list of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen to add or delete WLAN profiles.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘WLAN’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) WLAN profile list of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Enter the WLAN profile settings. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘WLAN’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) WLAN profile list of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.2.2 Security Layer 2 This menu provides a function of retrieving and configuring L2 security information set in the WLAN.

The items for configuring the security layer 2 are as follows:

[L2]

Item Description

Profile Name Profile name Layer 2 Security Type Basic Service Set (BSS) authentication type (NONE/Static WEP/802.1x (Dynamic WEP)/Static WEP + 802.1x (Dynamic WEP)/WPA + WPA2) MAC Authentication Configures the use of the MAC authentication. MAC Filter Configures a MAC filter.

[STATIC WEP]

Item Description

WEP key format Input format of the WEP encryption key (ASCII/HEX) - ASCII: ASCII string - HEX: Hexadecimal value WEP key length Key length (in bits) - 40 - 104 WEP key index Key index (range: 1-4) WEP key WEP encryption key

[802.1x(DYNAMIC WEP)]

Item Description

WEP key length (IEEE 1x) Key length (in bits) - 40 - 104 EAPol re-authentication EAP re-authentication interval (unit: seconds, range: 0-100,000)

[WPA+WPA2]

Item Description

WPA WPA Version 1

Item Description

Encryption method (WPA) Encryption method (TKIP/CCMP/BOTH) - TKIP: TKIP method - CCMP: AES-CCMP method - Both: TKIP and AES-CCMP methods WPA2 WPA Version 2 (must be enabled at all times) Encryption method (RSN) Encryption type WPA2 only supports CCMP and cannot be changed. Authentication key Authentication key algorithm (PSK/802.1x) management (802.1x) - PSK: PSK (shared key) authentication method - 802.1x: 802.1x authentication method using a RADIUS server Shared key format Input format of the shared key (ASCII/HEX) - ASCII: ASCII string - HEX: Hexadecimal value Shared key Shared key PMK validity (seconds) PMK validity (unit: seconds, range: 0-1,000,000) EAPoL re-authentication EAP re-authentication interval (unit: seconds, range: 0-100,000) Protected management Protected management frames (802.11w) function frames (PMF) - Disabled: Disables the function - Optional: Enables the function and allows connection even by devices not using the function - Required: Enables the function but allows connection only by devices using the function

Setup 1) Select the equipment (controller) to set in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘WLAN’  ‘Security Layer 2’ menu. 3) The configuration status is displayed on the screen. 4) If the WLAN profile ('Profile Name') desired to configure is selected, the screen is converted to the screen of configuring security layer 2. 5) Configure the item for setting the selected profile. 6) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

4.1.2.3 Security Layer 3 This menu provides a function of retrieving and configuring L3 security information set in the WLAN.

The configuration items are as follows:

[Security Layer 3]

Item Description

Profile Name Profile name Web Policy Whether to use a web policy Web Authentication Web authentication Upon Failure in MAC Upon failure in MAC authentication, uses web authentication. Authentication, Web Authentication Web Pass-Through Moves to a specific address all the time when the user wants to use the web. Conditional Web Transition Conditional redirection One-time Redirection One-time redirection Pre-authenticated ACL ACL applied before the guest is authenticated Web Page Type Select Web Page Type (Downloaded/External) URL Activate when select External for Web Page Type. URL to which the guest is redirected

[Web Authentification]

Item Description

Server Type Authentification Server Type 1st~2nd RADIUS Server RadiusServer for Authentification Cache Period (DAYS) Cache Period after authentificiation Action after authentification - Redirect: Excute redirect to defined URL - Request: Excute redirect to requested URL Selected Profile name Selected Profile name

Setup 1) Select the equipment (controller) to set in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘WLAN’  ‘Security Layer 3’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the security layer 3 is displayed on the screen.

4) If the WLAN profile (‘Profile Name’) desired to configure is selected, the screen is converted to the screen of configuring security layer 3. 5) Modify the item for setting the selected profile. 6) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

4.1.2.4 Security RADIUS This menu provides a function of retrieving or configuring the information related to the security of the RADIUS server set in the WLAN.

The configuration items of security RADIUS are as follows:

Item Description

Profile Name WLAN profile Fallback Interval Configures the fallback period. Charging Interval Configures the charging period. Authentication Server Whether to perform the role as an authentication server First to Third Authentication Configures an authentication server address. Servers Accounting Server Whether to perform the role as an accounting server First to Third Accounting Configures an accounting server address. Servers Selected Profile name Selected Profile name

Setup 1) Select the equipment (controller) to set in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘WLAN’  ‘Security RADIUS’ menu. 3) The configuration status is displayed on the screen. 4) If the WLAN profile (‘Profile Name’) desired to configure is selected, the screen is converted to the screen of configuring security RADIUS. 5) Enter the settings. 6) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

4.1.2.5 802.11a/n/ac This menu provides a function of retrieving or configuring the MCS information and data transmission rate of 802.11a/n/ac set in the WLAN.

The configuration items are as follows:

[Data Transmission Rate] Configure whether to use each data rate (Disable/Supported/Basic).

Item Description

6 Mbps Whether to use 6 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 9 Mbps Whether to use 9 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 12 Mbps Whether to use 12 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 18 Mbps Whether to use 18 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 24 Mbps Whether to use 24 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 36 Mbps Whether to use 36 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 48 Mbps Whether to use 48 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 54 Mbps Whether to use 54 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic)

[MCS Configuration]

Item Description

Configuring HT(802.11n) Rx Configures HT(802.11n) Rx-related MCS. MCS Configuring VHT(802.11ac) Configures VHT(802.11ac)-related MCS. MCS

Setup 1) Select the equipment (controller) to set in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘WLAN’  ‘802.11a/n/ac’ menu. 3) If the WLAN profile (‘Profile Name’) desired to configure is selected, the screen is converted to the setup screen. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

4.1.2.6 802.11b/g/n This menu provides a function of retrieving or configuring the MCS information and data transmission rate of 802.11b/g/n set in the WLAN.

The configuration items are as follows:

[Data Transmission Rate] Configure whether to use each data rate (Disable/Supported/Basic).

Item Description

1 Mbps Whether to use 1 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 2 Mbps Whether to use 2 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic)

Item Description

5.5 Mbps Whether to use 5.5 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 6 Mbps Whether to use 6 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 9 Mbps Whether to use 9 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 11 Mbps Whether to use 11 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 12 Mbps Whether to use 12 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 18 Mbps Whether to use 18 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 24 Mbps Whether to use 24 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 36 Mbps Whether to use 36 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 48 Mbps Whether to use 48 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic) 54 Mbps Whether to use 54 Mbps (Disable/Supported/Basic)

[MCS Configuration]

Item Description

Configuring HT(802.11n) Rx Configures HT(802.11n) Rx-related MCS. MCS

Setup 1) Select the equipment (controller) to set in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘WLAN’  ‘802.11b/g/n’ menu. 3) If the WLAN profile (‘Profile Name’) desired to configure is selected, the screen is converted to the setup screen. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

4.1.2.7 Advanced This menu provides a function of retrieving and configuring the WLAN information set in the controller.

The configuration items are as follows:

[WLAN Advanced Options]

Item Description

Profile Name Profile Name SSID Service set identifier ACL Rule Name of the ACL rule Non-permit of Static Address Configures whether to receive the IP address by using the DHCP.

Item Description

DHCP Override Configures whether to use the DHCP override function. DHCP Server Enters the address of the DHCP server (Configures when the DHCP override is enabled). WMM Configures Wifi-MultiMedia (WMM) mode (Multimedia packet QoS preferred) (Enable/Disable). Delivery Traffic Indication Enters the Beacon DTIM period (1~255). Message (DTIM) Terminal Timeout (sec.) Time to make the UE time out if the UE is idle AMPDU Configures AMPDU (Enable/Disable). VoIP Failure Detect Whether to use the VoIP failure detection function (Enable/Disable) Band Steering Configures band steering (Disable/5.0GHz preferred/2.4 GHz preferred). Load Balancing Whether to use the load balancing function (Enable/Disable) Threshold Threshold Maximum Denial Count Enters the maximum denial count. Multicast to Unicast Whether to use the multicast function (Enable/Disable) Discarding Multicast Packet Whether to use the function of discarding a multicast packet (Enable/Disable) REJECT PROBE Selects the requesting mode (RSSI, Time, Max. Allowed Stations). Requesting Mode 802.11K Configures 802.11K RRM - link-measurement - neighbor-report - beacon-passive-measurement - beacon-active-measurement - beacon-table-measurement - statistics-measurement - ap-channel-report MDNS Snooping Profile Configures mDNS Snooping Profile

Setup 1) Select the equipment (controller) to set in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘WLAN’  ‘Advanced’ menu. 3) The WLAN advanced configuration status is displayed on the screen. 4) If the WLAN profile (‘Profile Name’') desired to configure is selected, the screen is converted to the WLAN advanced configuration screen. 5) Enter the settings. 6) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

4.1.3 Radio This menu allows retrieval and configuration of various wireless-related settings.

Available menu items and settings vary according to the selected device type. When a controller is selected, the following menu items are available.  802.11a/n/ac  QoS (a/n)  802.11h (a/n)  802.11n/ac (a/n/ac)  Radio resource management (a/n)  802.11b/g/n  QoS (b/g/n)  802.11n (b/g/n)  Radio resource management (b/g/n)

When an AP is selected, the following menu items are available.  802.11a/n/ac  802.11b/g/n

4.1.3.1 802.11a/n/ac This menu allows retrieval and configuration of the following settings.

[Service]

Item Description

Service Enables/disables service

[General]

Item Description

Bandwidth (MHz) Specifies bandwidth Beacon Interval (TUS) Specifies beacon interval RTS Threshold (Bytes) RTS threshold value Short Retry Limit Count Short retry limit count Long Retry Limit Count Long retry limit count Fragmentation Threshold (Bytes) Fragmentation threshold value Tx MSDU Lifecycle (TUS) Valid Tx MSDU time Rx MSDU Lifecycle (TUS) Valid Rx MSDU time

Item Description

Maximum Connection AP Count Maximum allowed connection client count Controlled Voice Optimization Enables/disables controlled voice optimization Multi-antenna Mode Configures a multi-antenna mode (Dynamic/Static).

[Data Transfer Rate] Configures usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) for each data rate.

Item Description

6 Mbps 6 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 9 Mbps 9 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 12 Mbps 12 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 18 Mbps 18 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 24 Mbps 24 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 36 Mbps 36 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 48 Mbps 48 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 54 Mbps 54 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic)

[Call Admission Settings] The CAC function is provided to protect existing calls from the voice calls that are received by a wireless LAN. The controller does not allow any additional calls when the maximum number of allowed voice calls per radio is reached.

Item Description

Voice Optimization Enables/disables CAC Maximum number of calls Maximum number of calls Number of reserved H/O calls Number of reserved handover calls Minor Alarm Threshold Threshold to generate a minor level alarm Major Alarm Threshold Threshold to generate a major level alarm

[UE Admission Control]

Item Description

UE Extraction Control Whether to use extraction control of the UE which fails to connect consecutively Reconnection Count Threshold Number of maximum allowable reconnections of the UE which fails to connect consecutively

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘802.11a/n/ac’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.3.2 QoS (a/n) This menu allows retrieval and configuration of the following Qos (a/n) related settings.

[Wired QoS]

Item Description

Profile Selected profile TAGGING Policy-802.1p 802.1p QoS marking setting (None/User Priority/Default Value) TAGGING Policy-DSCP DSCP QoS marking setting (Select Enable to activate.) TAGGING Policy-External DSCP DSCP marking setting in the CAPWAP header (InnerPacket/Default Value) TAGGING Policy-Internal DSCP DSCP marking setting of packets coming from the controller and wireless device (No marking/Default Value) Protocol QoS protocol (None/802.1p/DSCP) Voice-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Voice-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Video-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a video packet Video-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a video packet BEST EFFORT-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet BEST EFFORT-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet Background-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a background packet Background-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a background packet

[Wireless QoS]

Item Description Profile Selected profile Voice-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Voice-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Video-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a video packet Video-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a video packet

Item Description BEST EFFORT-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet BEST EFFORT-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet Background-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a background packet Background-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a background packet

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘QoS (a/n)’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.3.3 802.11h (a/n) This menu allows retrieval and configuration of the following 802.11h (a/n) related settings.

Item Description Transmission Power Limit Signal strength limit Channel Switching Alarm Enables/disables channel switching alarm Limit Mode Enables/disables limit mode Channel Switching Times Channel switching times

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘802.11h (a/n)’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.3.4 802.11n/ac (a/n/ac) This menu allows configuration of the controller 802.11n (a/n/ac) related information.

[Global MCS]

Item Description Supported Specifies supported type HT (802.11n) Rx MCS Setting HT (802.11n) Rx related MCS Setting VHT (802.11ac) MCS Setting VHT (802.11ac) related MCS Setting

[Operation Type]

Item Description

Guard Interval-20 MHz Selects whether the guard Interval (20 MHz) is short or long. Guard Interval-40 MHz Selects whether the guard Interval (40 MHz) is short or long. Guard Interval-80 MHz Selects whether the guard Interval (50 MHz) is short or long. Beamforming Enables/disables beamforming

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘802.11n (a/n/ac)’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.3.5 Radio Resource Management (a/n) This menu allows configuration of the controller’s radio resource management (a/n) related information.

[Radio Resource Management]

Item Description

Status Enables/disables radio resource management RF Group Name RF group name

[Dynamic Power Management]

Item Description

Status Enables/disables dynamic power management RSSI Threshold (dBm) RSSI threshold of dynamic power management Scan Interval (sec) Power status info retrieval interval Minimum Transmission Power Minimum transmission power reference Maximum Transmission Power Maximum transmission power reference

[Dynamic Channel Selection]

Item Description

Status Enables/disables dynamic channel selection

Item Description

Scan Interval (sec) Power status info retrieval interval Channel Usage Threshold (%) Channel usage threshold Interferer Level Threshold (%) Interferer level threshold Delayed Channel Change Enables/disables delayed channel change Association Option Association option (Voice/Traffic/Station association) Anchor Start Time Anchor start time Anchor End Time Anchor end time DCS Channel DCS channel selection

[Coverage Hole Detection Control]

Item Description

Status Enables/disables coverage hole detection Collecting Statistics Enables/disables statistical collection Trap Warning Message Alert Enables/disables trap warning message alert Statistical Power Control Enables/disables statistical power control Activation Failed Client Count Ratio Failed client count ratio Minimum RSSI Threshold for Minimum RSSI threshold for voice traffic Voice Traffic (DBM) Minimum RSSI Threshold for Minimum RSSI threshold for data traffic Data Traffic (DBM) Failed Client Count Failed client count Time Interval Time interval

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘Radio Resource Management (a/n)’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.3.6 802.11b/g/n This menu allows configuration of the controller’s 802.11b/g/n related information.

[Service]

Item Description

Service Enables/disables service

[General]

Item Description

Beacon Interval (TUS) Specifies beacon interval RTS Threshold (Bytes) RTS threshold value Short Retry Limit Count Short retry limit count Long Retry Limit Count Long retry limit count Fragmentation Threshold (Bytes) Fragmentation threshold value Tx MSDU Lifecycle (TUS) Valid Tx MSDU time Rx MSDU Lifecycle (TUS) Valid Rx MSDU time Maximum Connection Count Maximum allowed connection client count Controlled Voice Optimization Enables/disables controlled voice optimization Multi-antenna Mode Configures a multi-antenna mode (Dynamic/Static).

[Data Transfer Rate] Configures usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) for each data rate.

Item Description

1 Mbps 1 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 12 Mbps 12 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 5.5 Mbps 5.5 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 6 Mbps 6 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 9 Mbps 9 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 11 Mbps 11 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 12 Mbps 12 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 18 Mbps 18 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 24 Mbps 24 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 36 Mbps 36 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 48 Mbps 48 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic) 54 Mbps 54 Mbps usage option (Disable/Supported/Basic)

Item Description

[UE Admission Control]

Item Description

UE Extraction Control Whether to use extraction control of the UE which fails to connect consecutively Reconnection Count Number of maximum allowable reconnections of the UE which Threshold fails to connect consecutively

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘802.11 (b/g/n)’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.3.7 QoS (b/g/n) This menu allows retrieval and configuration of the following Qos (b/g/n) related settings.

[Wired QoS]

Item Description

DSCP wireless device (No marking/Default Value) Protocol QoS protocol (None/802.1p/DSCP) Voice-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Voice-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Video-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a video packet Video-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a video packet BEST EFFORT-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet BEST EFFORT-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet Background-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a background packet Background-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a background packet

[Wireless QoS]

Item Description

Profile Selected profile Voice-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Voice-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Video-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a video packet Video-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a video packet BEST EFFORT-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet BEST EFFORT-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet Background-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a background packet Background-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a background packet

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘QoS (b/g/n)’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.3.8 802.11n (b/g/n) This menu allows configuration of the controller’s 802.11n (b/g/n) related information.

[Global MCS]

Item Description

Supported Selects a type that will be supported HT (802.11n) Rx MCS Setting HT (802.11n) Rx related MCS setting

[Operation Type]

Item Description

Guard interval-20 MHz Selects whether the guard Interval (20 MHz) is short or long. Guard interval-40 MHz Selects whether the guard Interval (40 MHz) is short or long. Beamforming Enables/disables beamforming

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘802.11n (b/g/n)’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the settings. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.3.9 Radio resource management (b/g/n) This menu allows configuration of the controller’s radio resource management (b/g/n) related information.

[Radio Resource Management]

Item Description

Status Enables/disables radio resource management RF Group Name RF group name

[Dynamic Power Management]

Item Description

Status Enables/disables dynamic channel selection RSSI Threshold (dBm) RSSI threshold

Item Description

Scan Interval (sec) Power status info retrieval interval Minimum Transmission Power Minimum Transmission Power Maximum Transmission Power Maximum Transmission Power

[Dynamic Channel Selection]

Item Description

Status Enables/disables dynamic channel selection Scan Interval (sec) Channel status info retrieval interval Channel Usage Threshold (%) Channel usage threshold Interferer Level Threshold (%) Interferer level threshold Delayed Channel Change Enables/disables delayed channel change Association Option Association option (Voice/Traffic/Station association) Anchor Start Time Anchor start time Anchor End Time Anchor end time DCS Channel DCS channel selection

[Coverage Hole Detection Control]

Item Description

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Radio’  ‘Wireless Resource Management (b/g/n)’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed.

4) Enter the settings. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.4 Interface 4.1.4.1 VLAN VLAN is a function that performs switching by grouping similar wireless terminals into a work group regardless of their location. As this is a virtual LAN, only the corresponding group is separated and processed. The impact of the unnecessary broadcasting packet can be eliminated and the stable switching sub-net can be configured. In the ‘VLAN’ menu, a list of configured VLANs is displayed and you can add or delete VLANs to and/or from it.

[VLAN]

Item Description

Interface name VLAN name VLAN ID VLAN ID value VLAN description Description of the VLAN Setup status Status that the administrator selected (up/down)

[Physical Port]

Item Description

Port Port name Mode Selects a hybrid mode (Not Used/Access/Trunk/Hybrid) Hybrid egress tagging VLAN Hybrid Egress tagging (Enable/Disable)

[IP address]

Item Description

IP address IP address Netmask Netmask value

[DHCP]

Item Description

Global use Enables/disables the DHCP service Option 82 status Enables/disables Option 82 Option 82 type Type of Option 82 (AP-MAC/AP-MAC-SSID/AP-ETHMAC)

[Access Configuration List]

Item Description

ACL name ACL name to be applied MDNS Snooping Profile Configures mDNS Snooping Prifle

Retrieving and Changing 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Interface’  ‘VLAN’ menu. 3) The VLAN-related configuration status is displayed on the screen. Modify the desired items. 4) Click the ‘Apply’ button to save and apply the settings.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Interface’  ‘VLAN’ menu. 3) The VLAN-related configuration status is displayed on the screen. 4) To Add a VLAN ID, click the ‘Add’ button. 5) The information input screen is displayed. Configures a VLAN name. 6) Enter the name of the VLAN ID you want to add. 7) Select between up or down for configuration status. 8) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Interface’  ‘VLAN’ menu. 3) The VLAN-related configuration status is displayed on the screen. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.4.2 Group The controller groups the different interfaces into separate interface groups so that a common profile or code can be applied to each group. In this menu, you can search and configure the interface groups of a registered device.

[General]

Item Description

Name Interface group name

Item Description

Description Description

[A List of Selected Interfaces]

Item Description

Name Move the interface list you want to configure onto the item on the left by using the << and >> buttons.

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Interface’  ‘Group’ menu. 3) The selected controller’s interface group list is displayed. 4) The operator can add or delete an interface group by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Interface’  ‘Group’ menu. 3) The selected controller’s interface group list is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) The information input screen is displayed. 6) Enter the information of an interface group.  Enter a group name in the ‘Name’ field.  Select the interfaces you want to add and decide whether to add each of them by using the arrow keys. 7) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Interface’  ‘Group’ menu. 3) The selected controller’s interface group list is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.4.3 Port This menu allows retrieval and configuration of the port information configured in the controller.

[Port]

Item Description

Name Name of the physical port Link status Information about port operation status Cable type Information about the type of connected cable Auto negotiation Enables/disables auto negotiation Connection status Information about connection status Link speed Link speed Duplexity Enables/disables the full duplex method Setup status Whether to use the port (Up/Down) Flow control Enables/disables the flow control MTU size Configures the size of MTU

[Switch Port]

Item Description

Status of the switch port Enables/disables the switch port IP address IP address assigned to the port Netmask Netmask of the IP address assigned to the port Bridge mode Uses bridge groups or Link Aggregate Groups (LAGs) (uses one of the two, sa1 and sa2) Storm control mode/level If you have selected bridge groups, configure storm control (Disable, Multicast, Broadcast, Both). The level of storm control means the number of packets that are allowed per second. A threshold must be set for it.

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Interface’  ‘Port’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the port configuration is displayed on the screen. 4) Select the port’s name (‘NAME’).The configuration screen related to port configuration will then appear. 5) Configure the port information. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.5 Security 4.1.5.1 RADIUS In the ‘RADIUS’ menu, you can configure the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server for UE authentication.

The RADIUS configuration information items are as follows:

[Radius Server]

Item Description

IP address IP address of the authentication server Type Server type (authentication, accounting, and authentication & accounting) Authentication port Port number of the authentication server Accounting port Port number of the accounting port Shared key Information about the public key Key type Type of authentication key Count of retransmissions Number of times retransmission is performed when there is no response Retransmission interval (sec) Retransmission interval when there is no response Number of times retransmission Number of times retransmission failover is performed failover is performed Change of Authorization (CoA) Whether to use CoA

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘RADIUS’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s RADIUS server is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) The input screen for the server configuration items is displayed. 6) Enter the RADIUS server configuration item information. 7) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘RADIUS’ menu. 3) The controller’s RADIUS server list is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.5.2 Subordinate Portal This menu is used to retrieve and configure information related to the web authentication page that appears when a guest user, who has been configured in the controller, connects to an AP.

[Web Page] The web page configuration items are as follows.

Item Description

Web page type Web authentication method - Internal: Default internal web pages - Downloaded: Downloading web pages to the system - Customized: Editing internal web pages Logo, Header, Body, Footer, etc. can be edited on internal web pages. After enabling the GUEST SELF REGISTRATION option, the user only needs to enter their name, email, etc. to access the Internet service.

[Web Service Address] The web service address setting item is as follows:

Item Description

Domain name Domain name The domain name entered is displayed so that the IP address of the web page is not exposed in tunnel mode. IP address IP address setting Since domain names cannot be used in local bridge mode, the address entered in the IP address field is displayed.

[Web Service Port] The web service port setting item is as follows:

Item Description

1~8 Configures a port.

[Web Authentication Cache List] Click the ‘Clear’ button to clear the web-authenticated user list.

Setup 1) Select the equipment (controller) to set in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Web Authentication’ menu. 3) The web authentication-related configuration value is displayed on the screen. 4) Enter settings. 5) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

4.1.5.3 Firewall General Determines whether to use the controller’s firewall function.

Item Description

Firewall Enables/disables the firewall

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Firewall General’ menu. 3) In the ‘firewall’ option, determine whether to use the firewall (Enable/Disable). 4) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.5.4 Firewall Policy A firewall is a function that blocks the infiltration of unwanted traffic from external networks. To this end, functions such as access filtering, Demilitarized Zone (DMZ), and port forwarding are provided.  Access filtering: This filtering prevents connections from unknown IP addresses. It is used not only to control access to resources that are not released externally, but also to control the external resources that members might access.  DMZ function: This is used to allow connections from outside while performing the access control service using a firewall. For LAN networks, such as web servers and mail servers that are protected by firewalls but require unrestricted connections from outside, the DMZ function separates these networks from LAN networks which have not had firewall blocking applied to them and ensures their connection to separate subnets.  Port forwarding: This is a similar function to DMZ, but instead ensures a connection to a specific network without using a separate detached DMZ port. Like the DMZ function, the extra network service that enables access to the office’s intranet from outside via the Internet can be enabled. However, when using the extra network service, it is important to ensure intranet security.

In the ‘Firewall Policy’ menu, you can retrieve and manage the controller’s firewall configuration status.

The configuration items for the firewall policy are as follows:

Item Description

Name Name of the firewall policy Operations Operations that the policy is to perform - Permit: Permission - Deny: Prohibition Protocol Protocol that the policy will use - Any: All are managed according to the configuration of ACTION - IP: Only IP is operated depending on action configuration. - UDP: Only the UDP is managed according to the configuration of ACTION - TCP: Only the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is managed according to the configuration of ACTION - ICMP: Only the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is managed according to the configuration of ACTION. Source IP address Source IP address Source netmask Source netmask Source port setup Defines the action of the source port (Any, =, RANGE) Destination IP address Destination IP address Destination netmask Destination netmask setup Destination port Defines the action of the destination port (Any, =, RANGE) ICMP Type Configures the type of the ICMP message to be transmitted in the network.

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Firewall Policy’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the firewall policy will be displayed on the screen. 4) You can add/delete a firewall policy by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen. To modify a firewall policy, click on the name (the ‘NAME’ item) of the firewall policy you want to modify.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Firewall Policy’ menu. 3) The firewall’s configuration status is displayed on the screen. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Enter the information by referring to the configuration item. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Firewall Policy’ menu. 3) The firewall’s configuration status is displayed on the screen. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.5.5 Firewall Interface The Firewall Interface is used to retrieve or modify the configuration status of the controller’s firewall interface and you can also add or delete a firewall interface to and/or from this menu.

The configuration items for the firewall interface are as follows:

Item Description

Interface Interface name Policy rule ACL name Direction Direction in which the firewall is applied - Ingress - Egress - Forward

Retrieving and Changing 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Firewall Interface’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s firewall interface is displayed. 4) You can add/delete a firewall interface by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen. To modify a firewall interface, click on the name (the ‘Interface’ item) of the interface you want to modify.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Firewall Interface’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s firewall interface is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Enter the information in the field of each configuration item. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Firewall Interface’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s firewall interface is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.5.6 NAT Pool The NAT pool is used to retrieve, modify, add, or delete the configuration status of the controller’s Network Address Translation (NAT) pool.

The configuration items for the NAT pool are as follows:

Item Description

Name Name of the NAT pool Starting IP address Start IP address of the NAT pool Ending IP address End IP address of the NAT pool Subnet mask IP subnet mask value

Retrieving and Changing 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Nat Pool’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s NAT pool is displayed. 4) You can add/delete a NAT pool by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen. To modify a NAT pool, click on the name (the ‘NAME’ item) of the NAT pool you want to modify.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Nat Pool’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s NAT pool is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Fill in the field of each NAT pool configuration item. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Nat Pool’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s NAT pool is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.5.7 NAT Policy The NAT policy is used to retrieve, modify, add, or delete the configuration status of the controller’s NAT policy.

The configuration items for the NAT policy are as follows:

[NAT Translation Rule]

Item Description

Type Translation Type - Dynamic Network Address Translation (DNAT) - Static Network Address Translation (SNAT) Direction Direction (Inside/Outside) Mode Translation mode (Static/List) Protocol type Type of protocol (Any/TCP/UDP) IP address Original IP address Port Original input port Translated IP address Changed IP address Translated port Changed port Firewall policy Name of the firewall policy NAT pool Name of the NAT pool

Retrieving and Changing 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Nat Policy’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s NAT translation is displayed. 4) You can add/delete a NAT translation by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen. To modify a NAT translation, click on the type of NAT translation you want to modify.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Nat Policy’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s NAT translation is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) The input screen for the NAT translation information is displayed. 6 ) Enter the information in the field of each configuration item. 7) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Nat Policy’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s NAT translation is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.5.8 NAT Interface The NAT interface is used to retrieve, modify, add, or delete the configuration status of the controller’s NAT interface.

The configuration items for the NAT interface are as follows:

Item Description

Name Name of the MAC filter Policy Policy to perform (Allow/Deny) Registration Upon Failure in MAC Configures access blocking if the UE fails to get MAC Authentication authentication. Access Blocking Time (min) Time to block the access Registration upon Detection of Configures access blocking if the malicious UE is detected. Malicious UE

Item Description

Access Blocking Time (min) Time to block the access Registration of UE with Configures access blocking if the UE has low association and Association and Handover handover success rate. Success Rate Access Blocking Time (min) Time to block the access

Retrieving and Changing 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘NAT Interface’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s NAT interface is displayed. 4) Click on the NAT interface whose configuration you want to modify. 5) Enter the information in the field of each NAT interface configuration item. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.5.9 MAC Filter The MAC filter is used to retrieve, modify, add, or delete the configuration status of the controller’s MAC filter.

The configuration items for the MAC filter are as follows:

Item Description

Name Name of the MAC filter Policy Policy to be carried out (Allow/Deny) Interval Interval for MAC filtering Count Number of applied MAC addresses

Retrieving and Changing 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘MAC Filter’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s MAC filter is displayed. 4) Click on the name (the ‘Number’ item) of the MAC filter whose configuration you want to modify. 5) Enter the information in the field of each MAC filter configuration item. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.5.10 TACACS+ The TACACS+(Terminal Access Controller Access Control System+) is used to retrieve, modify, add, or delete the configuration status of the controller’s TACACS+.

The configuration items for TACACS+ are as follows.

Item Description

ID TACACS+ server ID IP address TACACS+ server IP Shared key TACACS+ server shared key Port TACACS+ server port number (range: 1-65535, default: 49) Retransmission interval Retransmission interval for a + message (range: 1-5, default value: (sec) 2, unit: seconds) Retransmission times before Maximum retransmission times of TACACS+ message before a failover TACACS server failover is attempted (range: 0-3, default value: 2) Source IP address Source IP address of the TACACS+ message This must be one of the IP addresses configured in the W-EP WLAN system. Status Status of packet transmission to TACACS+ server (default: enable)

Retrieving and Changing 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘TACACS+’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s TACACS+ is displayed. 4) Click on the name (the ‘Number’ item) of the TACACS+ whose configuration you want to modify. 5) Enter the information in the field of each TACACS+ configuration item. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘TACACS+’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s TACACS+ is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) The input screen window for TACACS+ information is displayed. 6) Enter the information in the field of each configuration item. 7) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘TACACS+’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s TACACS+ is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.5.11 External BYOD (Bring Your Own Device) Server The function of configuring the external BYOD server is configured.

The configuration items of the operator are as follows:

Item Description

Service Whether to activate the external BYOD server interoperation function (Enable/Disable) Server IP Address 1 BYOD Server IP Address Airfront IP upon the interoperation with AirCuve BYOD Suite. Server IP Address 2 IP address of the Byfront IP upon the interoperation with AirCuve BYOD Suite Requested URL Upon the interoperation with AirCuve BYOD Suite, the HTTPS request URL necessary to update the list of all authentications

Item Description

Sync. Status Result value of updating the list of all authentications Sync. Failure Reason Reason of failure if the update of the list of all authentications fails - None: No failure - No response: When there is no response from the BYOD server - Invalid data format: When the BYOD server failed to send the data on the list of all authentications or in the invalid format

Viewing and Changing 1) Select the equipment (controller) to view in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘External BYOD Configuration’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the operator's authentication method of the controller is displayed. 4) Enter the setting information. 5) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings. 6) Click the ‘Force Sync’ button to check the status of the sync with the external BYOD server.

4.1.5.12 Operator The Operator menu is used to configure how the operator of the controller will be authenticated.

The operator’s configuration items are as follows.

Item Description

Authentication scheme - Local: Uses the authentication information of the controller itself - TACACS+: Uses the authentication information of the TACACS+ server - Local/TACACS+: Uses the authentication information of the controller itself/TACACS+ server - TACACS+/Local: Uses the authentication information of the TACACS+ server/controller itself

Retrieving and Changing 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Security’  ‘Operator’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the controller’s operator authentication type is displayed. 4) Click on the authentication type whose configuration you wish to modify. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.6 ACL The ACL allows different network access authority depending on the user. In addition, the ACL analyzes the packet information for network traffic control using many kinds of filtering methods, and provides a function that processes packets according to the method defined by the operator.

The key functions supported in relation to ACL are as follows.  IPv4 address and MAC address filtering function.  IP, TCP, UDP, and ICMP are supported.  Destination IP address and port, and source IP address, port, and protocol are supported. An IP address can be entered in wildcard form and a port can be specified in a range of numbers.  Admin ACL is supported, which enables packet control whose final destination is the controller.  Various operators are supported.

4.1.6.1 Time Profile The Time Profile menu is used to retrieve and configure the time profile of a registered device.

The configuration items for the time profile are as follows.

Item Description

Name Name of the time profile Type Information about the type of time profile (Absolute/Periodic) Period Period of time during which the time profile is applied (From now on/Range). This needs to be configured when the type is Periodic. Start date Information about the start date and time of ACL. This needs to be configured when the type is Absolute End date Information about the end date and time of ACL. This needs to be configured when the type is Absolute Date Date information that needs be configured when the type is Periodic and the period is Range Time Range of time in which ACL is applied. This needs to be configured when the type is Periodic. Repetition type How the ACL is applied repeatedly. This needs to be configured when the type is Periodic - Daily - Days of the Month - Days of the Week - Specific Days

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘Time Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the time profile is displayed. 4) You can add/delete a time profile by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘Time Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the time profile is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Open the input screen for the time profile information. 6) Enter the information in the field of each configuration item. 7) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘Time Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the time profile is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.6.2 IP ACL The IP ACL menu is used to retrieve and configure the IP ACL rules items of a registered device.

The configuration items for IP ACL rules are as follows:

Item Description

Name Name Sequence number Serial number Operations Permit/Deny Protocol Protocol Originating Origination Information(Any/Address/URL) Originating Port Number If TCP/UDP is selected as protocol, port number should be defined. Destination Destination Information(Any/Address/URL) Destination Port Number If TCP/UDP is selected as protocol, port number should be defined. TOS ToS Type (Not Used/DSCP/Precedence) Tos Value should be defined if selected except Not Used. OS AWARE OS aware value

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘IP ACL’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the selected controller’s IP ACL is displayed on the screen. 4) You can add/delete an IP ACL rule by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘IP ACL’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the selected controller’s IP ACL rules is displayed on the screen.

4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) The information input screen window is displayed. 6) Enter the information in the field of each configuration item. 7) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘IP ACL’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the selected controller’s IP ACL rules is displayed on the screen. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.6.3 Access Group (Interface) The Access Group menu is used to search and configure the access group of a registered device.

The configuration items for the access group are as follows.

Item Description

Interface Interface name Direction Direction of application (Ingress/Egress) ACL Rule Name of applied ACL rule

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘Access Group (Interface)’ menu. 3) The access group setup status of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Operator can add or delete an access group by clicking ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of screen

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘Access Group (Interface)’ menu. 3) The access group setup status of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Fill in the field of each access group configuration item. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘Access Group (Interface)’ menu. 3) The access group setup status of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.6.4 Access Group (System) In this menu, you can retrieve and configure information about the access group (system) that is configured in the controller.

The setup items are shown below:

Item Description

ACL rule Name of the ALC rule

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘Access Group (System)’ menu. 3) The access group setup status of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Modify the ‘ACL rule’ setup. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.6.5 Access Group (Wireless) This menu is used to retrieve or set up the access group (wireless) item configured in the controller. Set up the ACL rule to use in the WLAN profile in advance and apply it to the controller.

The setup items are shown below:

Item Description

Instance ID Instance ID ACL rule Name of applied ACL rule

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘access group (wireless)’ menu.

3) The access group (wireless) setup status of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Operator can add or delete an access group by clicking ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of screen

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘access group (wireless)’ menu. 3) The access group setup status of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Enter by referring to the access group (wireless) setup item. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘ACL’  ‘access group (wireless)’ menu. 3) The setup status of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.7 DHCP 4.1.7.1 Proxy/Relay The ‘Proxy/Relay’ menu is used to set up the controller-support Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Proxy/Relay mode. The DHCP proxy mode enables a wireless terminal to connect to a server while hiding the location of the DHCP server from the wireless terminal. The DHCP relay mode directly connects the DHCP request of a wireless terminal to a sever.

The Proxy/Relay setup information items are shown below.

Item Description

Mode DHCP service mode (Proxy/Relay) Timeout DHCP service timeout Existing DHCP server First DHCP server IP address Auxiliary DHCP server Second DHCP server IP address

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘DHCP’  ‘Proxy/Relay’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the Proxy/Relay setup information. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.7.2 Internal DHCP The internal DHCP menu is used to set up a DHCP server in a controller to provide DHCP service in an environment where an external DHCP server cannot be connected to.

The DHCP setup information items are shown below.

[DHCP Server]

Item Description

Service Status Enable/Disable of internal DHCP service

[Profile List] This menu is used to set up all the DHCP-related services supported by the controller in a batch by using a single profile.

The information items available in the profile list table is shown below.

Item Description

Name Profile name Network Network bandwidth to apply Netmask Netmask to apply allocation time (sec) DHCP lease time

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘DHCP’  ‘Internal DHCP’ menu. 3) The internal DHCP information of the controller is displayed. 4) You can add or delete a profile by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of screen.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer.

2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘DHCP’  ‘Internal DHCP’ menu.

3) The internal DHCP information of the controller is displayed.

4) Click the ‘Add’ button.

5) The screen switches to a profile setup screen.

6) Enter the profile list information detailed below and click ‘Setup’.

Item Description

Name Profile name Network Network bandwidth to apply Netmask Netmask to apply allocation time (sec) DHCP lease time Domain name DHCP domain name Default gateway Default gateway First-Third DNS mode IP address of the Domain Name Service (DNS) server First-Third NTP mode IP address of the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server

7) Set up the range pool items by clicking the ‘Add’ button. The setup items of the range pool are shown below.

Item Description

Profile name Profile name Starting IP address Starting IP address of the pool Ending IP address Ending IP address of the pool

8) Set up the fixed address pool items by clicking the ‘Add’ button. The fixed address pool setup items are shown below.

Item Description

Profile Name Profile name MAC address MAC address of the device to which the profile will be applied IPv4 address IP address of the device to which the profile will be applied

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘DHCP’  ‘Internal DHCP’ menu. 3) The profile server list of the controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.7.3 OS Aware The OS Aware menu is used to set up the information required for the system to recognize the OS of a terminal connected to the system.

The information displayed when selecting the menu is shown below.

[OS Aware]

Item Description

OS Name Sets the name of the operating system to be added. OS Type Configures an OS type (android, ios, windows, mac). Rank Configures OS Aware rank information. DHCP Option Configures the DHCP option number. Fingerprint Sets a fingerprint to be recognized.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘DHCP’  ‘OS Aware’ menu. 3) The OS Aware list table of the controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) An additional OS Aware pop-up is displayed. 6) Enter OS Aware information item and click ‘Setup’.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘DHCP’  ‘OS Aware’ menu. 3) The OS Aware list table of the controller is displayed. 4) Select the item you wish to delete in the list table. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button.

4.1.8 QoS 4.1.8.1 Profile You can retrieve or set up the Quality of Service (QoS) profile of a registered device.

The setup items of QoS profile are shown below.

Item Description

Name QoS profile name Description Description Maximum Dot1p tag QoS DOT1P priority tag Downward bandwidth limit per Upward limit speed user (Kbps) Upward bandwidth limit per user Downward limit speed (Kbps) Voice-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Voice-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a voice packet Video-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a video packet Video-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a video packet BEST EFFORT-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet BEST EFFORT-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a best effort packet Background-802.1p 802.1p QoS value that will be used for a background packet Background-DSCP DSCP QoS value that will be used for a background packet

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘QoS’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) The QoS profile setup status of a controller is displayed. 4) You can add or delete a profile by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of screen.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘QoS’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) The QoS profile setup status of a controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Enter a profile setup item. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘QoS’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) The QoS profile setup status of a controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.9 RBAC 4.1.9.1 Role Profile It provides a function of viewing and configuring a role profile of Role Based Access Control (RBAC) of the registered equipment.

The configuration items of the role profile are as follows:

Item Description

Name Name of the role profile ACL Rule Name of the applied ACL rule User QoS Name of the applied QoS Application QoS Name of applied Application QoS VLAN ID Applied VLAN ID value URL Redirect URL

Viewing 1) Select the equipment (controller) to display in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘RBAC’  ‘Role Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the role profile of the controller is displayed. 4) Click the 'Add' or 'Delete' button on the bottom of the screen to add or delete a profile.

Adding 1) Select the equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘RBAC’  ‘Role Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the role profile of the controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Enter the profile configuration item. 6) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select the equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘RBAC’  ‘Role Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the role profile of the controller is displayed. 4) Select the frontmost check box of the item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected item.

4.1.9.2 Applicable Profile The configuration items of the applicable profile are as follows:

Item Description

Name Name of the applicable profile Priority Priority to apply The condition to be used. Condition to be applied Role Profile Name of the applicable role profile

Viewing 1) Select the equipment (controller) to display in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘RBAC’  ‘Applicable Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the applicable profile of the selected controller is displayed on the screen. 4) Click the ‘Add’ or 'Delete' button on the bottom of the screen to add or delete a profile.

Adding 1) Select the equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘RBAC’  ‘Applicable Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the applicable profile of the selected controller is displayed on the screen. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Display the information entry screen. 6) Refer to the configuration items to enter the value. 7) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select the equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘RBAC’  ‘Applicable Profile’ menu.

3) The configuration status of the applicable profile of the selected controller is displayed on the screen. 4) Select the frontmost check box of the item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected item.

4.1.9.3 ACL Profile This menu provides a function of retrieving and configuring the ACL profile set in the controller.

The information items in the ACL profile table are as follows:

Item Description

Name Name of the ACL profile Number of ACLs Number of ACLs included in the ACL profile Number of All Rules Number of rules set in the ACL profile

Viewing 1) Select the equipment (controller) to view in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘RBAC’  ‘ACL Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the ACL profile of the selected controller is displayed on the screen. 4) Click the ‘Add’ or ‘Delete’ button on the bottom of the screen to add or delete a profile.

Adding 1) Select the equipment (controller) to view in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘RBAC’  ‘ACL Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the ACL profile of the selected controller is displayed on the screen. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) The information entry screen is displayed. 6) Enter the ACL profile information by referring to the following entry items.

[Profile]

Item Description

Name Name of the ACL profile to configure Number of ACLs Number of ACLs configured

[ACL]

Item Description

Name Locates the ACL list to configure and the ACL list desired on the left by using the << and >> buttons.

Deleting 1) Select the equipment (controller) to view in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘RBAC’  ‘ACL Profile’ menu. 3) The configuration status of the ACL profile of the selected controller is displayed on the screen. 4) Select the frontmost check box of the item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected item.

4.1.10 AP 4.1.10.1 Profile The ‘AP list’ menu is used to retrieve or set up the list of APs included in the selected controller. The setup screen is displayed when an operator selects an AP to set up in the list.

The setup items of AP list menu are as follows:

Item Description

Name A hyperlink leading to the screen for AP name or AP setup is provided. IP address Information of the IP address allocated to the AP MAC address MAC address of the AP Controller Name of the controller where the AP is connected Mode AP mode (General/Root/Repeater/Sniffer/Relay) In case of a remote AP, (r) is attached next to the mode. Configuration Status Up/down status by operator Operating Status Real time AP operation status (up/down) Ethernet Speed (MBPS) Link connection speed of AP Ethernet Duplex Link connection mode of AP 5 GHz channel Information of the 5 GHz channel currently being used 2.4 GHz channel Information of the 2.4 GHz channel currently being used Radio base MAC Radio base MAC address of the AP Model AP model

Deleting AP You can delete a specific AP in the AP list table. Select an AP to delete and click the ‘Delete’ button at the top right corner.

When an AP is deleted, it is deleted only in the selected controller and the setup

information in other controllers is not deleted.

Rebooting AP You can reboot a specific AP in the AP list table. Select an AP to reboot and click the ‘Reboot’ button at the top right corner.

4.1.11 AP group 4.1.11.1 Profile This menu is used to retrieve or set up a profile for the AP group in the controller. An operator can manage each group flexibly by using the ‘AP Group’ menu.

The information contained in the AP group table is shown below:

Item Description

Name AP group name In case of a remote AP group, (r) is attached next to the name. Number of APs Number of APs in the AP group Number of WLANs Number of WLANs in the AP group

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP Group’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) The AP group list of the selected controller is displayed. 4) You can add or delete an AP Groups by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen.

Adding 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP Group’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) The AP group list of the selected controller is displayed.

4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) The information input screen is displayed. 6) Enter AP group information.

Configuring 1) Select a device (controller) to configure in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configure’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP Group’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) The selected controller and its AP group list are shown. 4) Click the hyperlink of a ‘Name’ to configure. 5) Enter the settings by referring to the input fields shown below. (‘AP Group’ settings of the default AP group only provides configuration for Name, AP count, WLAN count, Location, and Setting status.) 6) Click the 'Set' button to apply the settings.

[AP group]

Item Description

Name Name of the AP group profile to configure If it is set as a remote AP group, selects a check box. Number of APs Number of APs included in the AP group Number of WLANs Number of WLANs set in the AP group AP application Select to apply the settings below to all APs added to the group AP mode Sets the AP operation mode - General AP: Basic AP mode for user service - Root AP: Backbone AP for repeater service. The UE accesses the repeater AP and then connects to the wired network via the root AP. - Repeat AP: Edge AP for repeater service. This is the actual AP accessed by the UE. Bridge service Sets the bridge service function provided in repeater AP mode UE service Sets the UE service function provided in root AP mode Map location Hyperlinked information of the AP location on the RF map. Click to view the linked RF map. IP mode IP configuration mode - DHCP: IP allocation by DHCP - AP Priority: Using the method configured in the AP Setting status Administrator setting information (Up, Down) concerning AP operation Discovery type Discovery type setting of the controller (AP Followed/APC Referral) First-third controller names Shows the order of controllers to be accessed by the AP

[AP list]

Item Description

Name Position the AP list to set up at the left side by using the << or >> button.

[WLAN list]

Item Description

Name Position the WLAN list to set up at the left side by using the << or >> button.

Deleting 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP Group’  ‘Profile’ menu. 3) The AP group list of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.11.2 Advanced This menu is used to process batch setup for the AP groups in a controller.

[Advanced]

Item Description

Name of AP Group Name of the AP group Application to AP The following items are applied in all APs added in the group if being selected: Echo Interval (sec.) Keep-alive interval of the CAPWAP session between AP and controller Maximum Discovery Interval Maximum waiting time before AP starts controller discovery (sec.) Reporting Interval (sec.) Interval at which the statistical information on WiFi decryption error is reported Statistical Timer (sec.) Interval at which the WiFi statistical information is reported Retransmission interval (sec.) First retransmission interval of the CAPWAP control packet Maximum retransmission count Maximum retransmission count of the CAPWAP control packet Echo Retransmission Interval Retransmission interval of the CAPWAP keep-alive packet (sec.)

Item Description

Maximum Echo Retransmission Maximum retransmission count of the CAPWAP keep-alive packet

Item Description

Telnet Whether to use the Telnet service (Enable/Disable), a service port set SSH Whether to use the SSH service (Enable/Disable), a service port set Console Whether to use the console service (Enable/Disable) DTLS Configures Datagram Transmission Layer Security (DTLS) for data security (Disable/Control-Only/Enable). LED Sets the type of use of LED (On/Off/Off-Time). - If Off-Time is selected, necessary to set a time. POE Type Sets a POE type (802.3at/802.3af/Auto).

[VLAN]

Item Description

VLAN Supported Sets the VLAN of the AP supported (Enabled/Disabled). NATIVE VLAN ID Sets a NATIVE VLAN value (if the VLAN supported is enabled, enabled).

Item Description

Country Code Country code Environment Installation environment - Both - Outdoor - Indoor - Non-country

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP Group’  ‘Advanced’ menu. 3) The AP group list of the selected controller is displayed.

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP Group’  ‘Advanced’ menu. 3) The AP group list of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Click the hyperlink of a ‘name’ to set up. 5) Enter an advanced setup information item. (In case of Default AP Group, VLAN setup is not supported.) 6) Apply the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.11.3 802.11a/n/ac This menu is used to set up the 802.11a/n of a controller.

[802.11a/n/ac]

Item Description

AP group name AP group name Service Service enable setup (Enable/Disable) Support Support Type Guard Interval -20 MHz Guard Interval (20 MHz) short/long selection Guard Interval -40 MHz Guard Interval (40 MHz) short/long selection Guard Interval -80 MHz Guard Interval (50 MHz) short/long selection Beamforming Beamforming use of not use (Enable/Disable) Channel Set up a channel to use Channel fix Channel fix setup (Enable/Disable) Transmission power Transmission power setup Power fix Power fix setup (Enable/Disable) Bandwidth (MHz) Bandwidth Max. connected APs Max. connected APs Multi-antenna Mode Configures a multi-antenna mode (Dynamic/Static).

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP group’  ‘802.11a/n’ menu. 3) The AP Group list of the selected controller is displayed.

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP group’  ‘802.11a/n’ menu. 3) The AP Group list of the selected controller is displayed. 4) Click the hyperlink of a ‘name’ to set up. 5) Enter a setup information item. 6) Apply the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.11.4 802.11b/g/n This menu is used to set up the 802.11b/g/n of a controller.

[802.11 b/g/n]

Item Description

AP group name AP group name Service Service enable setup (Enable/Disable) Support Support Type Guard Interval -20 MHz Guard Interval (20 MHz) short/long selection Guard Interval -40 MHz Guard Interval (40 MHz) short/long selection Beamforming Beamforming use of not use (Enable/Disable) Channel Set up a channel to use Channel fix Channel fix setup (Enable/Disable) Transmission power Transmission power setup Power fix Power fix setup (Enable/Disable) Max. connected APs Max. connected APs Multi-antenna Mode Configures a multi-antenna mode (Dynamic/Static).

Retrieving 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP group’  ‘802.11b/g/n’ menu. 3) The AP Group list of a selected controller is displayed.

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP group’  ‘802.11b/g/n’ menu. 3) The AP Group list of a selected controller is displayed. 4) Click the hyperlink of a ‘name’ to set up.

5) Enter a setup information item. 6) Apply the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.11.5 Remote AP group If the APs are located in an area where the APC is not located, those APs must be classified into a separate group for service. The APC can manage the APs in another area by grouping them into a remote AP group.

In the menu, the operator can configure the below information and the APs in the remote AP group operate based on the same configuration.

[Advanced Options]

Item Description

Backup RADIUS Server 1 First RADIUS server IP address or internal Backup RADIUS Server 2 Second RADIUS server IP address or internal Backup RADIUS Server 3 Third RADIUS server IP address or internal Range Operation range of the Send to APs button (All/ACL Profile Only)

Item Description

ACL Profile Name Name of the ACL profile to use Application to AP Selects the range to be applied to an AP added in the group.

[Tunnel Forwarding]

Item Description

WLAN WLAN ID to use Split Tunnel ACL Name of the ACL profile to use

[Local Bridging Forwarding]

Item Description

WLAN WLAN ID to use VLAN ID VLAN ID to use ACL Name of the ACL profile to use Pre-Authentication ACL Name of the pre-authentication ACL profile to use

Retrieving 1) Select the equipment (controller) to view in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP Group’  ‘Remote AP Group’ menu. 3) The list of remote AP groups of the selected controller appears.

Setup 1) Select the equipment (controller) to set in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘AP Group’  ‘Remote AP Group’ menu. 3) The list of remote AP groups of the selected controller appears. 4) Click the hyperlink of the ‘Name’ to be set. 5) Enter the settings. 6) Click the ‘Set’ button to apply the settings.

4.1.12 Mobility 4.1.12.1 Cluster An operator can modify the cluster related settings of a specific controller for a cluster group and enable/disable a service.

[Cluster Information]

Item Description

Cluster name Cluster name Connection maintaining interval Packet transmission interval for connection status check (sec) Connection maintaining re-attempt Packet retransmission times for connection status check times Service Status Service enable/disable status

[Cluster]

Item Description

Cluster ID Cluster ID Controller name Name of the controller in a cluster MAC address MAC address Cluster IP address Cluster IP address Synchronization interval Synchronization time interval Connection status Connection status

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Mobility’  ‘Cluster’ menu. 3) Set up an item to change on the screen. 4) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.13 Management 4.1.13.1 System Information The System Information menu is used to retrieve or set up the basic information of a selected controller.

The modifiable information is shown below:

Item Description

Name Controller name Location Physical location of the controller Contact Name and contact info of the operator and responsible person Operation time Operation time recorded since initial system operation Description Brief description of the system

Configuring Information 1) Select a controller to retrieve in Tree Viewer or the controller list table. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘System Information’ menu. 3) Modify the necessary items. 4) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.13.2 SNMP The SNMP menu is used to retrieve or set up the SNMP related information of a device registered in WEM.

The SNMP setup information is shown below:

[Community]

Item Description

Community SNMP community name Access type Access type (Read Only/Read Write)

Item Description

IP version IP address version (IPv4/IPv6) IPv4 address IPv4 address IPv6 address IPv6 address Netmask Netmask

[User]

Item Description

Name User name for SNMP v3 Access type Access type (Read Only/Read Write) Authentication protocol Protocol to be used for SNMP v3 authentication - Message-Digest algorithm 5 (MD5) - Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) Authentication key Authentication key to be used for SNMP v3 authentication Private protocol Private protocol to be used for SNMP v3 authentication - NONE: Encryption protocol is not applied. - Data Encryption Standard (DES) - Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Private key Private key to be used for SNMP v3 authentication

[Trap] The trap menu is used to retrieve or set up the trap server registered in a controller device.

The trap setup information items are shown below:

Item Description

Community name SNMP community name Trap version SNMP trap version information IP version IP address version IPv4 address Manager IPv4 address IPv6 address Manager IPv6 address Port Port number

Retrieve community 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu. 3) The community list of the controller is displayed. 4) You can add or delete a community by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen.

Add community 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu. 3) The community list of the controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Enter information into the community information input pop-up screen. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

Delete community 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu. 3) The community list of the controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Delete the item by clicking the ‘Delete’ button.

Retrieve user 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu. 3) The user list of the controller is displayed. 4) You can add or delete a user by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of screen.

Add user 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu. 3) The user list of the controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Enter user information. 7) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Add’ button.

Delete user 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu. 3) The user list of the controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

Retrieve trap 1) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu. 3) The trap list of the controller is displayed. 4) You can add or delete a trap by clicking the ‘Add’/‘Delete’ button at the bottom of the screen.

Add trap 1) Select an equipment (controller) to add in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu. 3) The trap list of the controller is displayed. 4) Click the ‘Add’ button. 5) Enter trap information. 7) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Add’ button.

Delete trap 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu. 3) The trap list of the controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.13.3 DNS The DNS menu is used to retrieve and set up the information related to the DNS server and relay service configured in a controller.  Configuring DNS Client: Set up external DNS servers that a controller refers to  Configuring DNS Relay: Set up a cache-containing relay that answers DNS requests from wireless terminals

The DNS setup items are shown below:

[Client]

Item Description

Service DNS service (Enable/Disable) First DNS address First DNS server IP address Second DNS address Second DNS server IP address Third DNS address Third DNS server IP address Query Interval DNS Query Interval of URL define at ACL

[Relay]

Item Description

Cache size Size of the cache to be used for DNS relay

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘DNS’ menu. 3) The DNS server setup status of the controller is displayed. 4) Enter information by referring to a DNS setup item. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.13.4 NTP The NTP menu is used to retrieve and set local time synchronization related information.

[NTP Client] The NTP client setup information is shown below:

Item Description

Polling Service NTP client service set up status Polling Interval Synchronization time interval of NTP client

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘NTP’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Select enable/disable in ‘Service’. 5) Set up the synchronization time interval of the NTP client in ‘Interval’. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button. 7) Set up the information of the NTP server where NTP clients will be connected by clicking the ‘Add’ button. The setup items of the NTP server are shown below:

항목 설명

Type NTP server type(IP Address, Domain) Server IP Address IP address of NTP server (If the domain is selected) Server Domain Name Domain name of NTP server (If the IP adress is selected)

Delete NTP server 1) Select an equipment (controller) to delete in the tree viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘NTP’ menu. 3) The NTP server list of the controller is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

[NTP Server] This menu is used to set up the internal NTP server status (enable/disable) of a controller. The setup information items are shown below:

Item Description

Service NTP server service setup status (Enable/Disable)

[AP NTP] The NTP client setup information relating to the AP are shown below:

Item Description

Mode Time setting mode of AP (TimeStamp/NTP Type) Stamp Interval Interval at which the APC transmits its time to the AP NTP Polling Interval Interval at which the AP receives time information from the NTP server

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘NTP’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Set up the synchronization time interval of the NTP client in ‘Interval’. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button. 7) Set up the information of the NTP server where AP NTP clients will be connected by clicking the ‘Add’ button. The setup items of the NTP server are shown below:

Item Description

No Number AP NTP server URL address of the NTP server which will bring connection time information from the AP

Delete AP NTP server 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘NTP’ menu. 3) The AP NTP server list is displayed. 4) Select the first checkbox of each item to delete. 5) Click the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected items.

4.1.13.5 System Log The ‘System Log’ menu is used to set up enable/disable of a system log and its level.

[System log mode] The system log mode setup items are shown below:

Item Description

Mode System log (Enable/Disable) Level Log level of system log (Information/Notice/Warning/Minor/Major/Critical)

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘System’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the system log mode setup information. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

[System log server] The system log server setup is used to retrieve or set up the system log server of a controller.

The system log mode setup items are shown below:

Item Description

System log server 1 First system log server IP address Port 1 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number of the first system log server System log server 2 Second system log server IP address Port 2 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number of the second system log server

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘System’ menu. 3) The system log server setup status of the controller is displayed. A maximum of two system log servers can be configured. 4) Click the IP address of the system log server you wish to change the settings of. 5) Enter information by referring to the setup items. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.13.6 Service [Telnet-SSH] This menu is used to retrieve or set up the information related to the telnet server and SSH server configured in a controller.

The Telnet-SSH setup items are shown below:

Item Description

Session timeout (sec) Timeout time when a session is idle Maximum number of sessions Maximum number of sessions allowed to connect to a service Telnet service Telnet service setup status (Enable/Disable) Port Telnet port number SSH service SSH server service setup status (Enable/Disable) Port SSH port number

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘Service’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter information into the telnet setup item. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

[FTP] This menu is used to retrieve or set up the information related to the FTP server configured in a controller.

The setup items of FTP server are shown below:

Item Description

Service Service setup status Port Port number

Item Description

ID User ID Password User password

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘Service’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter information into the FTP setup item. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

[Secure FTP] This menu is used to retrieve or set up the information related to the secure FTP (secure File Transfer Protocol) server service configured in a controller.

The secure FTP setup items are shown below:

Item Description

Service Service setup status ID User ID Password User password

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘Service’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter information into the secure FTP server setup item. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

[HTTP] This menu is used to retrieve or set up the information related to the HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) server service configured in a controller.

The HTTP setup items are shown below:

Item Description

Service Service setup status (Enable/Disable)

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘Service’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the HTTP server setup item information. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

[HTTPs] This menu is used to retrieve or set up the information related to the Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPs) server service registered in a controller.

The HTTPs setup items are shown below:

Item Description

Service Service setup status (Enable/Disable)

Setup 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘Service’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Enter the HTTPs server setup item information. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.13.7 Time The Time menu is used to set up the local time information that will be used for a controller.

The time information setup information items are shown below:

[Local Time]

Item Description

Time Specify time that will be used for the controller. Time zone Specify time zone that will be used for the controller.

Setup 1) Select a controller to set up in Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘Time’ menu. 3) Set up the setup information items.

4) Apply the time settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.13.8 Reboot The ‘reboot’ menu is used to retrieve or set up the reboot information configured in a controller.

The setup information items are shown below:

[Reboot Setup]

Item Description

Now Rebooted immediately. Elapsed time Rebooted when a specific amount of time has elapsed Specific time Rebooted at a specific time Schedule cancel The saved rebooting settings are all cancelled.

Setup 1) Select a controller to reboot in Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘Reboot’ menu. 3) Set up the reboot items. 4) Execute or reserve reboot by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.13.9 Backup/Recovery The ‘Backup/Recovery’ menu is used to back up the following information of a controller or apply the saved settings to the controller.  Setup information  Controller debugger file  Controller log file

The backup/recovery information items are shown below:

[Backup/Recovery]

Item Description

Backup/Recovery Specify the item of a file to back up or recover. - Config File Backup - Config File Restore - APC Debug File Backup - APC Log File Backup File name Specify the name of a file to back up or recover.

Setup 1) Select a controller to set up in Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘Backup/Recovery’ menu. 3) Set up the setup information items. 4) Apply Backup/Recovery by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.1.13.10 Threshold This is used to retrieve and set up the threshold of the CPU occupancy rate and memory usage configured in a controller.

[CPU Usage Rate]

Item Description

Threshold CPU usage rate threshold which will generate an alarm

[Memory Usage]

Item Description

Threshold Memory usage threshold which will generate an alarm

Configure threshold 1) Select an equipment (controller) to set up in the Tree Viewer. 2) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller/Device’  ‘Management’  ‘Threshold’ menu. 3) The setup status is displayed. 4) Modify each threshold. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.2 AP 4.2.1 AP summary information The AP summary information menu is used to retrieve the list of all the APs registered in WEM and the summary information of each AP. The AP summary information screen is shown below.

Figure 85. Summary information screen

Each item of the AP summary information screen is shown below.

Item Description

Name This is used to provide a hyperlink to the detailed information window of a specific AP by using the name information from an AP. IP address IP address of AP WAN interface MAC address Physical address of AP WAN interface Controller The controller name connceted with a specific AP. Mode AP operation mode - General AP: Basic AP mode for user services - Root AP: A backbone AP for the repeater service. The wireless terminal is connected to the repeater AP and then the wired network via the root AP. - Repeater AP: As an edge AP for repeater service, the AP actually connected by the wireless terminal. - Sniffer AP: An AP which does not provide a user service but provides a function of capturing a packet in an air section packet (If the AP mode is a sniffer AP, establish the client IP address.) - Relay AP: An AP connecting the repeater AP with the root AP wirelessly Configuration Status Information on the operator configuration status for the operation of the AP (Up, Down) Operating Status Information on actual operating status of the AP (Up, Down) Ethernet Speed (MBPS) Information on the status of the link connection speed

Item Description

Ethernet Duplex Information on the link connection mode of AP 5 GHz channel Information on 5 GHz channel in use by the AP 2.4 GHz channel Information on 2.4 GHz channel in use by the AP Radio Base MAC Information on the base MAC address allocated to the WLAN interface Model AP model name

Retrieving 1) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘AP’ menu. 2) The list of configurable APs is displayed on the screen.

Search condition setup You can retrieve the information of a particular AP by clicking the search condition setup button ( ) on the AP summary information screen. The available search conditions are shown below.  Controller name  AP Mode  Setup status  Operation status  Ethernet Speed (MBPS)  Ethernet Duplex

Figure 86. Search condition setup screen

Delete You can delete a selected AP by clicking the ‘Delete’ icon in the top right-hand corner of the AP summary information screen.

Reboot You can reboot a selected AP by clicking the ‘Reboot’ icon in the top right-hand corner of the AP summary information screen.

4.2.2 System In the AP summary information screen that appears when you select an AP in Configuration Management, you can set up a specific AP by clicking the hyperlink of the AP.

4.2.2.1 General You can retrieve or set up the following item when you select an AP.

Item Description

AP name Set up AP name. Group name Information of the group to which the AP belongs AP Mode Sets the AP operating mode. - General AP: Basic AP mode for user services - Root AP: A backbone AP for the repeater service. The wireless terminal is connected to the repeater AP and then the wired network via the root AP. - Repeater AP: As an edge AP for repeater service, the AP actually connected by the wireless terminal. - Sniffer AP: An AP which does not provide a user service but provides a function of capturing a packet in an air section packet - Relay AP: An AP connecting the repeater AP with the root AP wirelessly Bridge service Sets the bridge service function provided in repeater AP mode UE service Sets the UE service function provided in root AP mode Client IP address Client IP setting in Sniffer AP mode MAC address Physical address of the AP WAN interface Map Location As hyperlink information for the location on the RF map of the AP. Click the link to immediately move to the concerned RF map. Location Necessary to explain the location of the equipment and to be configured by the operator IP Mode IP Setting Mode - DHCP: IP is allocated to DHCP. - AP Priority: Under the method designated to the APs. - Static IP: Static IP used Discovery Type Sets the controller discovery type (AP Followed/APC Referral). Configuration Status Information on the operator configuration status for the operation

Item Description

of the AP (Up, Down) Operating Status Actual operating status of the AP (Up, Down) Names of the First to Third Shows the order of controllers to which the APs will be Controllers connected.

Setup 1) Go to ‘Configuration Management’  ‘AP’ menu. 2) Click the hyperlink of the AP to be set in the list of APs on the Summarized AP Information displayed on the screen. 3) Select ‘System’  ‘General’ in the display screen. 4) The item that can be set is displayed on the screen and the value of the field that can be changed is modified. 5) Click the ‘Set’ button to apply the settings.

4.2.2.2 Advanced You can retrieve or set up the following item when you select an AP.

[Advanced]

Item Description

AP name AP name Echo interval (sec) CAPWAP session keep-alive interval between AP and controller Maximum discovery interval Maximum waiting time before an AP starts controller discovery (sec) Report interval (sec) Interval of reporting Wi-Fi decryption error statistical information Statistics timer (sec) Interval of reporting Wi-Fi statistical information Retransmission interval (sec) First retransmission interval of CAPWAP control packet Maximum retransmission Maximum retransmission times of CAPWAP control packet times Echo retransmission interval Retransmission interval of CAPWAP keep-alive packet (sec) Maximum echo retransmission Maximum retransmission times of CAPWAP keep-alive packet Telnet This is used to set up telnet service, usage and port information. SSH This is used to set up SSH service, usage and port information. Console Sets whether to use the console service. DTLS DTLS usage setup (Disable/Control-Only/Enable) LED Set up LED ON/OFF and OFF time. POE Type Sets a POE type (802.3at/802.3af/Auto). VLAN support Set up VLAN support (Enable/Disable).

Item Description

NATIVE VLAN ID Set up NATIVE VLAN ID Country Code Device country setup status Environment Device installation environment - Both - Outdoor - Indoor - Non-country Edge AP Edge AP setup (Enable/Disable)

[Time]

Item Description

Time Time zone setup per country/city

[Log Backup] This provides the log backup hyperlink for an AP. When clicking the hyperlink, the log backup operation is immediately started.

Setup 1) Go to ‘Configuration Management’  ‘AP’ menu. 2) Click the hyperlink of the AP to be set in the list of APs on the Summarized AP Information displayed on the screen. 3) Select ‘System’  ‘Advanced’ in the display screen. 4) The item that can be set is displayed on the screen and the value of the field that can be changed is modified. 5) Click the ‘Set’ button to apply the settings.

4.2.3 Radio In the AP summary information screen that appears when you select an AP in Configuration Management, you can set up radio for a specific AP by clicking the hyperlink of a specific AP name.

4.2.3.1 802.11a/n/ac This menu is used to retrieve or set up 802.11a/n/ac related community.

[General]

Item Description

AP name AP name information Service Sets whether to activate the service. Channel Set up a radio channel to use. Channel fix Channel fix setup (Enable/Disable) Transmission power Set up transmission power level. External antenna gain Sets the gain value of the external antenna. Power fix Power fix setup (Enable/Disable) Maximum allowed number of terminals Set up maximum allowed number of terminals. Multi-antenna mode Configures a multi-antenna mode (Dynamic/Static).

[Operation Type]

Item Description

Supported 802.11n/ac support enable/disable

Setup 1) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘AP’ menu. 2) In the AP list of the AP summary information displayed on a screen, click the AP hyperlink to set up. 3) In the output screen, select ‘radio’  ‘802.11a/n/ac’. 4) The configurable items are displayed on a screen and then modify the value of a field that can be modified. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.2.3.2 802.11b/g/n This menu is used to retrieve or set up 802.11b/g/n related community.

[General]

Item Description

AP name AP name information Service Sets whether to activate the service. Channel Set up a radio channel to use. Channel fix Channel fix setup (Enable/Disable) Transmission power Set up transmission power level. Power fix Power fix setup (Enable/Disable) External antenna gain Sets the gain value of the external antenna. Maximum allowed number of terminals Set up maximum allowed number of terminals. Multi-antenna mode Configures a multi-antenna mode (Dynamic/Static).

[Operation Type]

Item Description

Supported 802.11n support enable/disable

Setup 1) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘AP’ menu. 2) In the AP list of the AP summary information displayed on a screen, click the AP hyperlink to set up. 3) In the output screen, select ‘radio’  ‘802.11b/g/n’. 4) The configurable items are displayed on a screen and then modify the value of a field that can be modified. 5) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Set’ button.

4.2.4 Remote AP In the AP summary information screen that appears when you select an AP in Configuration Management, you can set up radio for a specific AP by clicking the hyperlink of a specific AP name.

4.2.4.1 General This menu is used to retrieve or set up remote AP-related items.

[General]

Item Description

Name of AP Name of the AP now set Group Name Name of the group where APs are added ACL Profile Name Name of the ACL profile set Range Operation range of the Send to APs button (All/ACL Profile Only)

[Tunnel Forwarding]

Item Description

WLAN WLAN ID to use Split Tunnel ACL Split tunnel ACL to use

[Local Bridging Forwarding]

Item Description

Number Remote AP serial number WLAN WLAN ID to use VLAN ID VLAN ID to use ACL ACL profile name to use Pre-authenticated ACL Pre-authenticated ACL profile name to use

Retrieving 1) Go to ‘Configuration Management’  ‘AP’  ‘Select AP List’  ‘Remote AP’ menu. 2) The remote AP configurable item is displayed on the screen. 3) Click the ‘Add’ or ‘Delete’ button on the bottom of the screen to add or delete the setting.

Setup 1) Go to ‘Configuration Management’  ‘AP’  ‘Select AP List’  ‘Remote AP’ menu. 2) The remote AP configurable item is displayed on the screen. 3) Select the number and then the remote AP setup screen where the information can be changed appears. 4) Change the item. 5) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Adding 1) Go to ‘Configuration Management’  ‘AP’  ‘Select AP List’  ‘Remote AP’ menu. 2) The remote AP configurable item is displayed on the screen. 3) Click the ‘Add’ button. 4) Enter the information on the pop-up information entry screen. 5) Click the ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Deleting 1) Select the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘AP’  ‘Select AP List’  ‘Remote AP’ menu. 2) The list of remote APs is displayed on the screen. 3) Select the checkbox at the most front of the item to delete. 4) Delete an item by clicking the ‘Delete’ button.

4.3 Mobility Group 4.3.1 Cluster Lists ‘Cluster Lists’ menu provides to display the cluster group list. User can modify the information by selecting the Cluster list

The descriptions of Cluster List parameters are as follows:

Parameter Description

CLUSTER NAME Name of the Cluster List KEEP ALIVE INTERVAL (sec) Keep alive interval KEEP ALIVE RETRY COUNTs Keep alive retry counts

Modify Cluster List 1) Select the APC (controller) on the Tree Viewer. 2) Go to ‘Configuration’  ‘Mobility Group’ to open Mobility Group Window. 3) Enter the required parameters to change the setting. 4) Click ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

4.4 Controller Template 4.4.1 Template The controller template is a function of storing a set of specific settings in one file and selecting controllers to apply all the settings and applying them. It allows frequently used features to be stored and applied in a lump. This function can reduce a task of setting every controller by selecting several controllers at the same time and applying settings in a lump.

The controller template runs in the ‘Configuration Management’  ‘Controller Template’ menu

Figure 87. Template List Screen

Adding For all template items, the Add button is provided. When you click the Add button on the template list screen (Fig. 88), you can set and save a configuration group with a specific feature. Click the ‘Save’ button on the adding screen and then settings are saved under the template name as the required input element. Press the ‘Close’ button on the adding screen and then the screen returns to the template list screen.

Figure 88. Template Adding Screen

Changing To change a specific template item, click the name of the template you want to change on the template list screen. In the case, the screen same as the ‘Adding’ screen appears and you can check the pre-set value. Change the information and click the ‘Save’ button and then the information is changed to the template and then saved.

Deleting Select the check box of the item you want to delete on the template list screen and click the ‘Delete’ button on the bottom.

Application To apply a specific template, press the ‘Apply’ button. The ‘Apply’ button is on the template list screen and the ‘Add’ and ‘Change’ screens. To apply on the template list screen, select the check box of the item to apply in the list and press the ‘Apply’ button (Fig. 90). To apply the ‘Adding’ or ‘Changing’ screen, click the name of the template in the template list and select the check box of the module in the screen you want to apply before pressing the ‘Apply’ button (Fig. 91). If there is no check box, all are applied. Among them for ACL, OS Aware of DHCP, AP, Management Controller Account, SNMP, and NTP templates, select the check box on the line you want to apply in the content added in the table and press the ‘Apply’ button (Fig. 92). Press the ‘Apply’ button and a new window appears (Fig. 92). The left of the window is in a tree form and you can select several groups or controllers. Select the checkbox of the controller you want to apply and press the ‘Apply’ button at the bottom right to apply to each selected controller sequentially and then whether to succeed or fail in the application to each controller is displayed in the progress bar.

Figure 89. Application on Template List Screen

Figure 90. Application on Adding and Changing Screens

Figure 91. Application on Screens of Adding and Changing Templates with Table

Figure 92. Controller Selection and Application

4.4.2 System 4.4.2.1 General The ‘System’  ‘General’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting general information relating to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Repeater Service]

Item Description

Service Repeater service enabled or disabled

[SIP ALG]

Item Description

SIP ALG (VoIP AWARE) Activates or deactives the SIP ALG (VoIP AWARE) service. Sending CAC Limit Error Activates or deactivates the error response function. Response Message Detecting Long Time Call Activates or deactivates the long time call detection function. No Response Call-based Time Configures the reference time to process as no response (sec.) call. Long Time Connected Call-based Configures the reference time to determine as a long time Time (sec.) connected call. SIP Monitoring Port 1 Configures port 1 for monitoring SIP ALG. SIP Monitoring Port 2 Configures port 2 for monitoring SIP ALG. SIP Monitoring Port 3 Configures port 3 for monitoring SIP ALG. SIP Monitoring Port 4 Configures port 4 for monitoring SIP ALG. SIP Monitoring Port 5 Configures port 5 for monitoring SIP ALG.

[Audio Call Monitoring]

Item Description

Voice Quality Monitoring Activates or deactivates a function of monitoring the voice quality of the system.

Item Description

Improved Voice Quality Monitoring Activates or deactivates a function of monitoring the improved voice quality of the system. FTP Public Port Number Sets FTP public port number. SFTP Public Port Number Sets SFTP public port number. HTTP Public Port Number Sets HTTP public port number. HTTPS Public Port Number Sets HTTPS public port number.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.2.2 Country The ‘System’  ‘Country’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting a country code and an environment to be applied in the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Configured Country Code]

Item Description

Basic Country Code Designates the country to be applied to the controller. Basic Environment Designates a controller operating environment. (indoor, outdoor, both, non-country)

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.3 WLAN 4.4.3.1 Profile The ‘WLAN’  ‘Profile’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information relating to the WLAN to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Profile]

Item Description

Name Profile Name SSID Service set identifier Interface Group Name of the interface group Radio Frequency band (2.4 GHz/5 GHz) CAPWAP Tunnel Mode Configures a CAPWAP tunnel mode. SSID Hide Configures SSID hide. AAA Override Activates or deactivates the AAA override function. No. of Maximum UEs Connected Configures number of maximum UEs connected. Guest Service Service support or not.

[Security Layer 2]

Item Description

Layer 2 Security Type Sets the Layer 2 security function type (NONE, Static WEP, 802.1x (Dynamic WEP), Static WEP+802.1x (Dynamic WEP), WPA+WPA2). MAC Authentication Configures the use of the MAC authentication. MAC Filter Configures a MAC filter.

[Security Layer 3]

Item Description

Web Policy Whether to use a web policy Web authentication Web authentication Web Authentication upon Failure in Upon failure in MAC authentication, uses web MAC Authentication authentication. Web Pass-through Moves to a specific address all the time when the user wants to use the web. Conditional Web Redirection Conditional redirection One-time redirection One-time redirection Pre-authenticated ACL ACL applied before the guest is authenticated Overriding Redirect URL Configures the overriding redirect URL status (enable/disable). URL URL to which the guest is redirected

[Security RADIUS]

Item Description

Fallback Interval Configures the fallback period. Charging Interval Configures the charging period. Authentication Server Whether to perform the role as an authentication server First to Third Authentication Servers Configures an authentication server address. Accounting Server Whether to perform the role as an accounting server First to Third Accounting Servers Configures an accounting server address.

[WLAN Advanced Options]

Item Description

ACL Rule Name of the ACL rule Whether to Disallow Static Address Configures whether to receive the IP address by using the DHCP. DHCP Override Configures whether to use the DHCP override function. DHCP Server Enters the address of the DHCP server (Configures when the DHCP override is enabled). WMM Sets the WMM mode. DTIM Beacon DTIM: 1~255 (default: 1) Terminal Timeout (sec.) Sets the idle timeout of the UE. AMPDU Sets AMPDU.

Item Description

VoIP Failure Detect Sets the detection of communication failure. Band Steering Sets band steering. Load Balancing Sets load balancing. Threshold Sets threshold setting. Maximum Denial Count Sets the maximum denial count. Multicast to Unicast Whether to use the multicast function (Enable/Disable) Discarding Multicast Packet Whether to use the function of discarding a multicast packet (Enable/Disable) REJECT PROBE Requesting Mode Selects the requesting mode (RSSI, Time, Max. Allowed Stations).

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4 Radio 4.4.4.1 802.11 a/n/ac The ‘Radio’  ‘802.11a/n/ac’ menu of the controller template provides a function of configuring information relating to 802.11a/n/ac to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Service]

Item Description

Service Sets whether to activate or deactivate the service.

[General]

Item Description

Bandwidth (MHz) Sets the bandwidth. Beacon Interval (TUS) Sets the Beacon interval. Fragmentation Threashold (Byte) Fragmentation threashold Voice Control Optimization Whether to use the voice control optimization function Maximum Connected Client Count Maximum number of connectible clients

[Data Transmission Rate]

Item Description

6~54 Mbps Whether to support data transmission rate each (Disable/Supported/Basic).

[Configuring Call Admission]

Item Description

Voice Management Control Support Whether to use CAC Maximum Number of Calls Maximum number of calls Number of Reserved Handover Calls Number of reserved H/O calls MINOR Alarm Threshold The minor level threshold at which an alarm occurs

Item Description

MAJOR Alarm Threshold The major level threshold at which an alarm occurs

[UE Admission Control]

Item Description

UE Extraction Control Whether to use the UE extraction control Reconnection Count Threshold Sets the reconnection count threshold.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4.2 QoS(a/n) The ‘Radio’  ‘QoS (a/n)’ menu of the controller template provides a function of configuring information relating to QoS (a/n) to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Wired QoS]

Item Description

Profile Selects a profile. TAGGING Policy (802.1p) Sets 802.1p QoS marking (None/User Priority/Default Value). TAGGING Policy (DSCP) Sets DSCP QoS marking (Activated with Enable). TAGGING Policy (External DSCP) Sets the DSCP item marking of the CAPWAP header (InnerPacket/(Default Value). TAGGING Policy (Internal DSCP) Sets the DSCP item marking of the packet coming from the controller and the wireless terminal (No marking/Default Value). Protocol QoS protocol (None/802.1p/DSCP) Voice-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the voice packet Voice-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the voice packet Video-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the video packet Video-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the video packet

Item Description

BEST EFFORT-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the best effort packet BEST EFFORT-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the best effort packet Background-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the background packet Background-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the background packet

[Wireless QoS]

Item Description

Profile Selects a profile. Voice-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the voice packet Voice-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the voice packet Video-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the video packet Video-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the video packet BEST EFFORT-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the best effort packet BEST EFFORT-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the best effort packet Background-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the background packet Background-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the background packet

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4.3 802.11h(a/n) The ‘Radio’  ‘802.11h (a/n)’ menu of the controller template provides a function of configuring information relating to 802.11h to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[802.11h]

Item Description

Transmission Power Limitation Sets the signal strength limitation value. Channel Switching Notification Activates or deactivates channel switching notification. Limitation Mode Whether to use a limitation mode

Item Description

Number of Channel Switching Sets the number of channel switching.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4.4 802.11n (a/n/ac) The ‘Radio’  ‘802.11n (a/n/ac)’ menu of the controller template provides a function of configuring information relating to 802.11n (a/n/ac) to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Global MCS]

Item Description

Supported Selects a supported type. Configuring HT (802.11n) Rx MCS Configures HT (802.11n) Rx-related MCS. Configuring VHT (802.11ac) MCS Configures VHT (802.11ac)-related MCS.

[Operating Type]

Item Description

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4.5 Radio Resource Management (a/n) The ‘Radio’  ‘Radio Resource Management (a/n)’ menu of the controller template provides a function of configuring information relating to RRM (a/n) to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Radio Resource Management]

Item Description

Status Activates or deactivates the radio resource management function. RF Group Name Sets the name of RF group.

[Dynamic Power Management]

Item Description

Status Activates or deactivates the dynamic power management function. RSSI Threshold (dBm) Sets the RSSI threshold of the dynamic power management operation. Scanning Interval (sec.) Sets the interval of viewing the power status information. Minimum Transmission Power Sets the minimum transmission power standard. Maximum Transmission Power Sets the maximum transmission power standard.

[Selecting Dynamic Channel]

Item Description

Status Activates or deactivates the function of selecting a dynamic channel. Scanning Interval (sec.) Sets the interval of viewing the power status information. Channel Usage Rate Threshold Sets the channel usage rate threshold and the internal usage (%) rate threshold. Interference Source Grade Sets the interference source grade threshold. Threshold (%)

Item Description

Delayed Channel Change Whether to use the delayed channel change Recognition Option Sets whether to use the voice, traffic, and station recognition options and the number of stations. Anchor Starting Time Sets the start time of the anchor. Anchor End Time Sets the end time of the anchor. Country Not a real set value but an option to show the DSC channel on the bottom DCS Channel Sets the DCS channel.

[Coverage Hole Detection Control]

Item Description

Status Activates or deactivate the coverage hole detection function. Collecting Statistics Activates or deactivates the use of collecting statistics. Trap Warning Message Activates or deactivates trap warning message notification. Notification Activating Statistics Power Control Activates or deactivates statistics power control. Percentage of Failed Client Count Whether to use the percentage of failed client count Minimum RSSI Threshold of Voice Sets minimum RSSI threshold of voice traffic. Traffic (DBM) Minimum RSSI Threshold of Data Sets minimum RSSI threshold of data traffic. Traffic (DBM) Failed Client Count Sets failed client count. Time Interval Sets the time interval.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4.6 802.11b/g/n The ‘Radio’  ‘802.11b/g/n’ menu of the controller template provides a function of configuring information relating to 802.11b/g/n to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Service]

Item Description

Service Sets whether to activate or deactivate the service.

[General]

Item Description

Beacon Interval Sets the Beacon interval. Fragmentation Threashold Fragmentation threashold (Byte) Voice Control Optimization Whether to use the voice control optimization function Maximum Access Count Number of stations allowed to be limited to access

[Data Transmission Rate]

Item Description

1~54 Mbps Whether to support data transmission rate each (Disable/Supported/Basic).

[Configuring Call Admission]

Item Description

Voice Optimization Whether to use CAC Maximum Number of Calls Maximum number of calls Number of Reserved Handover Number of reserved H/O calls Calls MINOR Alarm Threshold Minor level threshold at which an alarm occurs MAJOR Alarm Threshold Major level threshold at which an alarm occurs

[UE Admission Control]

Item Description

UE Extraction Control Whether to use the UE extraction control Reconnection Count Threshold Sets the reconnection count threshold.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4.7 QoS (b/g/n) The ‘Radio’  ‘QoS (b/g/n)’ menu of the controller template provides a function of configuring information relating to QoS (b/g/n) to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Wired QoS]

Item Description

Profile Selects a profile. TAGGING Policy (802.1p) Sets 802.1p QoS marking (None/User Priority/Default Value). TAGGING Policy (DSCP) Sets DSCP QoS marking (Activated with Enable). TAGGING Policy (External Sets the DSCP item marking of the CAPWAP header DSCP) (InnerPacket/Default Value). TAGGING Policy (Internal Sets the DSCP item marking of the packet coming from the DSCP) controller and the wireless terminal (No marking/Default Value). Protocol QoS protocol (None/802.1p/DSCP) Voice-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the voice packet Voice-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the voice packet Video-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the video packet Video-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the video packet BEST EFFORT-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the best effort packet BEST EFFORT-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the best effort packet Background-802.1p 802.1p QoS value to be used in the background packet Background-DSCP DSCP QoS value to be used in the background packet

[Wireless QoS]

Item Description

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4.8 802.11n (b/g/n) The ‘Radio’  ‘802.11n (b/g/n)’ menu of the controller template provides a function of configuring information relating to 802.11n (b/g/n) to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Global MCS]

Item Description

Supported Selects the supported type. Configuring HT (802.11n) Rx Configures HT (802.11n) Rx-related MCS. MCS

[Operating Type]

Item Description

Guard Interval-20 MHz Selects whether the guard Interval (20 MHz) is short or long. Guard Interval-40 MHz Selects whether the guard Interval (40 MHz) is short or long. Beamforming Whether to use beamforming (Enable/Disable)

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4.9 Radio Resource Management (b/g/n) The ‘Radio’  ‘Radio Resource Management (b/g/n)’ menu of the controller template provides a function of configuring information relating to RRM (b/g/n) to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Radio Resource Management]

Item Description

Status Sets whether to operate the radio resource management function. RF Group Name Sets the name of RF group.

[Dynamic Power Management]

Item Description

Status Sets whether to operate the dynamic power management function. RSSI Threshold (dBm) Sets the RSSI threshold of the dynamic power management operation. Scanning Interval (sec.) Sets the interval of viewing the power status information. Minimum Transmission Power Sets the minimum transmission power standard. Maximum Transmission Power Sets the maximum transmission power standard.

[Selecting Dynamic Channel]

Item Description

Status Sets whether to operate the function of selecting a dynamic channel. Scanning Interval (sec.) Sets the interval of viewing the power status information. Channel Usage Rate Threshold Sets the channel usage rate threshold and the internal usage (%) rate threshold. Interference Source Grade Sets the interference source grade threshold. Threshold (%)

Item Description

[Coverage Hole Detection Control]

Item Description

Status Sets whether to operate the coverage hole detection function. Collecting Statistics Whether to use collecting statistics Trap Warning Message Whether to use trap warning message notification Notification Activating Statistics Power Whether to use the activation of statistics power control Control Percentage of Failed Client Whether to use the percentage of failed client count Count Minimum RSSI Threshold of Sets minimum RSSI threshold of voice traffic. Voice Traffic (DBM) Minimum RSSI Threshold of Sets minimum RSSI threshold of data traffic. Data Traffic (DBM) Failed Client Count Sets failed client count. Time Interval Sets the time interval.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.5 Security 4.4.5.1 RADIUS The ‘Security’  ‘RADIUS’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information relating to the RADIUS to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[RADIUS Server]

Item Description

Type Selects a type of the RADIUS server. IP address Configures an IP address. Authentication Port Sets an authentication port. Key Format Selects a key format. Shared Key Sets a shared key. Count of retransmissions Sets retransmission count. Retransmission interval (sec.) Sets the retransmission interval. Retransmission Failover Count Sets retransmission failover count. Change of Authorization (CoA) Whether to use CoA

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.6 ACL 4.4.6.1 IP ACL The ‘ACL’  ‘IP ACL’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information relating to the ACL to the controllers in a lump.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[ACL]

Item Description

Name Sets a name. Sequence Number Sets sequence number. Operation Sets permit or denial. Protocol Sets a protocol (Any, ICMP, TCP, UDP). The source IP address Sets a source IP address value. Source Net Mask Sets a source mask value. The destination IP address Sets a target IP address value. Destination Net Mask Sets a target mask value. TOS Type ToS type (Not Used/DSCP/Precedence) TOS Value Configure the ToS value. OS AWARE OS Aware value

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.7 DHCP 4.4.7.1 Proxy/Relay The ‘DHCP’  ‘Proxy/Relay’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information relating to the Proxy/Relay of the controllers to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Proxy/Relay]

Item Description

Mode DHCP service mode (Proxy/Relay) Timeout Timeout of the DHCP service Basic DHCP Server The IP adress of the first DHCP server Secondary DHCP Server The IP adress of the second DHCP server

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.7.2 OS Aware The ‘DHCP’  ‘OS Aware’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information relating to OS Aware to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[OS Aware]

Item Description

OS Name Sets the name of the operating system to be added.

Item Description

OS Type Configures an OS type (android, ios, windows, mac). Rank Configures OS Aware rank information. DHCP Option Configures the DHCP option number. Fingerprint Sets a fingerprint to be recognized.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.8 QoS 4.4.8.1 Profile The ‘QoS’  ‘Profile’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting QoS profile information to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Profile]

Item Description

Name Sets the name of a profile. Description Sets explanation. Maximum Dot1p Tag Sets maximum Dot1p tag. Limitation of Downstream Sets the limitation of downstream bandwidth by user (Kbps). Bandwidth by User (Kbps) Limitation of Upstream Sets the limitation of upstream bandwidth by user (Kbps). Bandwidth by User (Kbps) Voice-802.1p Sets Voice-802.1p. Voice-DSCP Sets Voice-DSCP. Video-802.1p Sets Video-802.1p. Video-DSCP Sets Video-DSCP. Best Effort-802.1p Sets Best Effort-802.1p. Best Effort-DSCP Sets Best Effort-DSCP. Background-802.1p Sets Background-802.1p. Background-DSCP Sets Background-DSCP.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.9 AP 4.4.9.1 Profile The ‘AP’  ‘Profile’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the AP profile to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Profile]

Item Description

Name of AP Sets the name of an AP. MAC ADDRESS Sets MAC ADDRESS.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1. You can import a file by using the ‘Import’ button.

4.4.10 Management 4.4.10.1 Controller Account The ‘Management’  ‘Controller Account’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the account information to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Profile]

Item Description

Level Sets the connection level (Administrator/Operator/Monitor/Lobby Ambassador). User User Account Password User password Checking Password Enters the user password again.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.10.2 SNMP The ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting SNMP to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Community]

Item Description

Community Name of SNMP community

Item Description

Access Type Access type (Read Only/Read Write) IP version IP address version (IPv4/IPv6) IPV4 address IPv4 address IPV6 address IPv6 address Net Mask Net mask

[User]

Item Description

Name The name of a user for SNMP v3 Access Type Access type (Read Only/Read Write) Authentication Protocol Protocol to be used for SNMP v3 authentication - Message-Digest algorithm 5 (MD5) - Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) Authentication Key Authentication key to be used for SNMP v3 authentication Private Protocol Private protocol to be used for SNMP v3 authentication - NONE: Encrypted protocol not applied. - Data Encryption Standard (DES) - Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Private Key Private key to be used for SNMP v3 authentication

[Trap]

Item Description

Community Name Name of SNMP community Trap Version SNMP trap version information IP version IP address version IPV4 address Manager IPv4 address IPV6 address Manager IPv6 address Port Port number

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.10.3 DNS The ‘Management’  ‘DNS’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the information relating to DNS of the controllers to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

Item Description

Service Whether to use the DNS service First DNS Address The IP adress of the first DNS server Second DNS Address The IP adress of the second DNS server Third DNS Address The IP adress of the third DNS server

[Relay]

Item Description

Cache Size The cache size to be used in DNS relay

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.10.4 NTP The ‘Management’  ‘NTP’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information on the NTP client and the NTP server to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[NTP Client]

Item Description

Polling The configuration status of the NTP client service Polling Interval The synchronization time interval of the NTP client

Item Description

Type NTP server type (IP Address, Domain) Server IP address IP address of the NTP server (if Domain is selected as a type) Server Domain Name Name of the domain of the NTP server (if IP Address is selected as a type)

[NTP Server]

Item Description

Service Service configuration status of the NTP server (enabled/disabled)

[AP NTP]

Item Description

Mode Time Setting Mode of AP (TimeStamp/NTP Type) Stamp Interval Interval at which the APC transmits the time of the APC to the AP NTP Polling Interval Interval at which the AP receives time information from the NTP server Server URL address of the NTP server which will bring connection time information from the AP

Item Description

Server URL address of the NTP server which will bring connection time information from the AP

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.10.5 System Log The ‘Management’  ‘System Log’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the information relating to the sytem logs of the controller in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[System Log Mode]

Item Description

Mode Whether to create system log (Enable/Disable) Severity Log severity which will leave system logs (Information/Notice/Warning/Minor/Major/Critical)

[System Log Server]

Item Description

System Log Server 1 The IP adress of the first system log server Port 1 The port number of the user datagram protocol (UDP) of the first system log server System Log Server 2 The IP adress of the second system log server Port 2 The port number of the user datagram protocol (UDP) of the second system log server

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.10.6 Service The ‘Management’  ‘Service’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information on service activation and ports to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Telnet-SSH]

Item Description

Session Timeout (sec.) Sets the session timeout. Maximum Session Number Sets the maximum number of sessions. Telnet Service Whether to activate the Telnet service Port Set a Telnet port. SSH Service Whether to activate the SSH service Port Sets a SSH port.

[FTP]

Item Description

Service Whether to activate the FTP service Port Sets a FTP port. ID Sets a FTP ID. Password Sets a FTP password.

[Security FTP]

Item Description

Service Whether to activate the security FTP service ID Sets a security FTP ID. Password Sets a security FTP password.

[HTTP]

Item Description

Service Whether to activate the HTTP service

[HTTPs]

Item Description

Service Whether to activate the HTTPs service

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.10.7 Time The ‘Management’  ‘Time’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting a local time to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Local Time]

Item Description

Time Designate the time to be applied to the controller. Time Zone Designate the time zone to be applied to the controller.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.10.8 Reboot The ‘Management’  ‘Reboot’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting a reboot set in the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Reboot Settings]

Item Description

Now Rebooted immediately Elapsed Time Rebooted when a specific time has elapsed Specific Time Rebooted at a specific time Schedule Cancellation All reservations for reboots which have been set previously are canceled.

[Saving Settings]

Item Description

Reboot after Saving Rebooted after saving the settings Reboot without Saving Rebooted without saving the settings

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.4.10.9 Alarm Threshold The ‘Management’  ‘Alarm Threshold’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the information relating to the ‘alarm threshold’ of the controller in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[CPU Usage Rate]

Item Description

Threshold CPU usage rate threshold which will generate an alarm

[Memory Usage]

Item Description

Threshold Memory usage threshold which will generate an alarm

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5 AP Template 4.5.1 Template The AP template is a function of storing a set of settings relating to APs under one name and selecting APs to which the settings will be applied in a lump and applying them to the APs. By doing so, it can store configuation sets with specific features which are frequently used. Therefore, the operator does not have to configure such frequently used configuration sets every time. In addition, it can reduce a task of setting every AP by selecting several controllers at the same time and applying settings in a lump.

The AP template runs in the ‘Configuration Management’ ‘AP Template’ menu.

Figure 93. Template List Screen

Adding For all template items, the Add button is provided. When you click the Add button on the template list screen (Fig. 94), you can set and save a configuration group with a specific feature. Click the ‘Save’ button on the adding screen and then settings are saved under the template name as the required input element. Press the ‘Close’ button on the adding screen and then the screen returns to the template list screen.

Figure 94. Template Adding Screen

Delete Select the check box of the item you want to delete on the template list screen and click the ‘Delete’ button on the bottom.

Application To apply a specific template, press the ‘Apply’ button. The ‘Apply’ button is on the template list screen and the ‘Add’ and ‘Change’ screens. To apply on the template list screen, select the check box of the item to apply in the list and press the ‘Apply’ button (Fig. 96). To apply the ‘Adding’ or ‘Changing’ screen, click the name of the template in the template list and select the check box of the module in the screen you want to apply before pressing the ‘Apply’ button (Fig. 97). If there is no check box, all are applied. Press the ‘Apply’ button and then a new window appears (Fig. 98). The left of the window is in a tree form and you can select several APs or controllers here. Select the checkbox of the controller you want to apply and press the ‘Apply’ button at the bottom right to apply to each selected AP sequentially and then whether to succeed or fail in the application to each controller is displayed in the progress bar.

Figure 95. Application on Template List Screen

Figure 96. Application on Adding and Changing Screens

Figure 97. Controller Selection and Application

4.5.2 System 4.5.2.1 General The ‘System’  ‘General’ menu of the AP template provides a function of setting information to be set to the APs in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[General]

Item Description

Name of AP Sets the name of the AP. AP Mode AP operation mode - General: Basic AP mode for user services - Root AP: A backbone AP for the repeater service. The wireless terminal is connected to the repeater AP and then the wired network via the root AP. - Repeater AP: As an edge AP for repeater service, the AP actually connected by the wireless terminal.

Item Description

- Sniffer AP: An AP which does not provide a user service but provides a function of capturing a packet in an air section packet (If the AP mode is a sniffer AP, establish the client IP address.) - Relay AP: An AP connecting the repeater AP with the root AP wirelessly Location Location of the AP IP Mode IP Setting Mode - DHCP: IP is allocated to DHCP. - AP Priority: Under the method designated to the APs. - Static IP: Static IP used Discovery Type Sets the controller discovery type (AP Followed/APC Referral). Names of First to Third Shows the order of controllers to which the APs will be connected. Controllers

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.5.1.

4.5.2.2 Advanced The ‘System’  ‘Advanced’ menu of the AP template provides a function of setting detailed items to be set to the APs in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Advanced Options]

Item Description

Echo Interval (sec.) Keep-alive interval of the CAPWAP session between AP and controller Maximum Discovery Interval Maximum waiting time before AP starts controller discovery (sec.) Reporting Interval (sec.) Interval at which the statistical information on WiFi decryption error is reported Statistical Timer (sec.) Interval at which the WiFi statistical information is reported Retransmission interval First retransmission interval of the CAPWAP control packet (sec.)

Item Description

Maximum retransmission Maximum retransmission count of the CAPWAP control packet count Echo Retransmission Retransmission interval of the CAPWAP keep-alive packet Interval (sec.) Maximum Echo Maximum retransmission count of the CAPWAP keep-alive packet Retransmission Telnet Sets whether to use Telnet and a port. SSH Sets whether to use Secure Shell (SSH) and a port. Console Whether to activate the AP console DTLS Sets whether to activate DTLS (Disabled/Control-Only/Enabled). LED Selects an LED option and sets the time. POE Type Selects a POE type. VLAN Supported Whether to support the Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) NATIVE VLAN ID Sets a native VLAN ID. Country Configuration status of the country where the equipment is made Environment Equipment installation environment - Both - Outdoor - Indoor - Non-country Edge AP Sets an edge AP.

[Time]

Item Description

Time Sets time zone by country/city.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.5.1.

4.5.3 Radio 4.5.3.1 802.11a/n/ac The ‘Radio’  ‘802.11a/n/ac’ menu of the AP template provides a function of setting information relating to the radio in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[General]

Item Description

Service Sets whether to activate the service. Channel Sets a radio channel to be used. Fixed Channel Sets whether to fix a channel (Enabled/Disabled). Transmission Power Sets the transmission power level. Fixed Power Sets whether to fix power (Enabled/Disabled). Maximum Number of UEs Maximum number of UEs allowed to be connected Allowed to Be Connected

[Operating Type]

Item Description

Supported Sets whether 802.11n/ac is supported.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.5.1.

4.5.3.2 802.11b/g/n The ‘Radio’  ‘802.11b/g/n’ menu of the AP template provides a function of setting information relating to the radio in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[General]

Item Description

Service Sets whether to activate the service. Channel Sets a radio channel to be used. Fixed Channel Sets whether to fix a channel (Enabled/Disabled). Transmission Power Sets the transmission power level. Fixed Power Sets whether to fix power (Enabled/Disabled). Maximum number of UEs Maximum number of UEs allowed to be connected allowed to be connected

[Operating Type]

Item Description

Supported Sets whether 802.11n is supported.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.5.1.

4.5.4 Security 4.5.4.1 RADIUS The ‘Security’  ‘RADIUS’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information relating to the RADIUS to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[RADIUS Server]

Item Description

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.5 ACL 4.5.5.1 IP ACL The ‘ACL’  ‘IP ACL’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information relating to the ACL to the controllers in a lump.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[ACL]

Item Description

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.6 DHCP 4.5.6.1 Proxy/Relay The ‘DHCP’  ‘Proxy/Relay’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information relating to the Proxy/Relay of the controllers to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Proxy/Relay]

Item Description

Mode DHCP service mode (Proxy/Relay) Timeout Timeout of the DHCP service Basic DHCP Server The IP adress of the first DHCP server Secondary DHCP Server The IP adress of the second DHCP server

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.6.2 OS Aware The ‘DHCP’  ‘OS Aware’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information relating to OS Aware to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[OS Aware]

Item Description

OS Name Sets the name of the operating system to be added.

Item Description

OS Type Configures an OS type (android, ios, windows, mac). Rank Configures OS Aware rank information. DHCP Option Configures the DHCP option number. Fingerprint Sets a fingerprint to be recognized.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.7 QoS 4.5.7.1 Profile The ‘QoS’  ‘Profile’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting QoS profile information to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Profile]

Item Description

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.8 AP 4.5.8.1 Profile The ‘AP’  ‘Profile’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the AP profile to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Profile]

Item Description

Name of AP Sets the name of an AP. MAC ADDRESS Sets MAC ADDRESS.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1. You can import a file by using the ‘Import’ button.

4.5.9 Management 4.5.9.1 Controller Account The ‘Management’  ‘Controller Account’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the account information to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Profile]

Item Description

Level Sets the connection level (Administrator/Operator/Monitor/Lobby Ambassador). User User Account Password User password Checking Password Enters the user password again.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.9.2 SNMP The ‘Management’  ‘SNMP’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting SNMP to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Community]

Item Description

Community Name of SNMP community

Item Description

Access Type Access type (Read Only/Read Write) IP version IP address version (IPv4/IPv6) IPV4 address IPv4 address IPV6 address IPv6 address Net Mask Net mask

[User]

Item Description

[Trap]

Item Description

Community Name Name of SNMP community Trap Version SNMP trap version information IP version IP address version IPV4 address Manager IPv4 address IPV6 address Manager IPv6 address Port Port number

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.9.3 DNS The ‘Management’  ‘DNS’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the information relating to DNS of the controllers to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

Item Description

Service Whether to use the DNS service First DNS Address IP adress of the first DNS server Second DNS Address IP adress of the second DNS server Third DNS Address IP adress of the third DNS server

[Relay]

Item Description

Cache Size Cache size to be used in DNS relay

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.9.4 NTP The ‘Management’  ‘NTP’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information on the NTP client and the NTP server to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[NTP Client]

Item Description

Polling Configuration status of the NTP client service Polling Interval Synchronization time interval of the NTP client

Item Description

[NTP Server]

Item Description

Service Service configuration status of the NTP server (enabled/disabled)

[AP NTP]

Item Description

Server URL address of the NTP server which will bring connection time information from the AP

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.9.5 System Log The ‘Management’  ‘System Log’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the information relating to the sytem logs of the controller in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[System Log Mode]

Item Description

Mode Whether to create system log (Enable/Disable) Severity Log severity which will leave system logs (Information/Notice/Warning/Minor/Major/Critical)

[System Log Server]

Item Description

System Log Server 1 IP adress of the first system log server Port 1 Port number of the user datagram protocol (UDP) of the first system log server System Log Server 2 IP adress of the second system log server Port 2 Port number of the user datagram protocol (UDP) of the second system log server

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.9.6 Service The ‘Management’  ‘Service’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting information on service activation and ports to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Telnet-SSH]

Item Description

[FTP]

Item Description

Service Whether to activate the FTP service Port Sets a FTP port. ID Sets a FTP ID. Password Sets a FTP password.

[Security FTP]

Item Description

Service Whether to activate the security FTP service ID Sets a security FTP ID. Password Sets a security FTP password.

[HTTP]

Item Description

Service Whether to activate the HTTP service

[HTTPs]

Item Description

Service Whether to activate the HTTPs service

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.9.7 Time The ‘Management’  ‘Time’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting a local time to be applied to the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Local Time]

Item Description

Time Designate the time to be applied to the controller. Time Zone Designate the time zone to be applied to the controller.

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.9.8 Reboot The ‘Management’  ‘Reboot’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting reboot set in the controllers in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[Reboot Settings]

Item Description

Now Rebooted immediately Elapsed Time Rebooted when a specific time has elapsed Specific Time Rebooted at a specific time Schedule Cancellation All reservations for resetting which have been set previously are canceled.

[Saving Settings]

Item Description

Reboot after Saving Rebooted after saving the settings Reboot without Saving Rebooted without saving the settings

The procedures of adding, changing, deleting or applying a template are same. Refer to Section 4.4.1.

4.5.9.9 Alarm Threshold The ‘Management’  ‘Alarm Threshold’ menu of the controller template provides a function of setting the information relating to the ‘alarm threshold’ of the controller in a lump.

The items are given below.

[Template Name]

Item Description

Template Name Name of the template

[CPU Usage Rate]

Item Description

Threshold CPU usage rate threshold which will generate an alarm

[Memory Usage]

Item Description

Threshold Memory usage threshold which will generate an alarm

Template Add/Modify/Delete/Apply

Add, Modify, Delete, Apply, method refer to Section 4.5.1.

4.6 Security 4.6.1 Interferer This function provides to set source of WLAN interference for AP that can cause interference.

The parameters are as follows:

Parameter Description

Interferer 2.4 GHz Bluetooth device, microwave. Jammer, wireless telephone, video camera, zigbee device Interferer 5 GHz Jammer, wireless telephone, video camera

Setting Interferer 1) Select the AP controller on the Tree Viewer. 2) Go to ‘Configuration’  ‘Security’  ‘Interferer’. 3) Change the information. 4) Click the ‘Set’ button, save the data.

CHAPTER 5. Admin

This chapter describes the WEM admin window and features.

The ‘Admin’ menu can be distinguished as follows:  Alarm  Software  Settings  License

5.1 Alarm 5.1.1 Audible Alarm The ‘Audible Alarm’ notifies an operator of a fault by generating a particular sound (audible sound).

Each item is shown below.

Item Description

Mute Whether to generate an audible sound. By Grade Play - Repeat: Whether to generate an audible sound once or repeatedly - No Interception: If this item is checked, the first audible sound is played in its entirely and then other sounds are played after that. Level Alarm level that will generate an audible sound - Critical/Major/Minor: Policy Policy of generating audible sound - Representative alarm/Final alarm - List of audible sound exception code Fault code-based Play Repeat: Whether to generate an audible sound once or repeatedly Sound source Select a sound source for an audible sound.

Stop an audible sound being played 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Alarm’  ‘Audible Alarm’ menu. 2) Click the ‘Pause’ button at the bottom of the screen.

Setup 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Alarm’  ‘Audible Alarm’ menu. 2) The setup status of audible sound is displayed on the screen. 3) Select an item to change. If you select the ‘Mute’ checkbox, all other items become disabled. 4) To set up an audible alarm code, select the ‘Final Alarm’ of the ‘Policy’ (Policy of generating audible sound) and click the ‘Add’ button on the right-hand side. 5) The audible alarm code search screen is displayed. 6) After selecting ‘NE type’, ‘NE Version’, ‘Event Type’, click ‘Search’ button. 7) If the search result is displayed on the screen, select an alarm code and click the ‘add’ button. 8) Click the ‘Set’ button.

5.1.2 Ticketing group When an alarm occurs, WEM transmits its details and location to the previously configured e-mail list. The ‘E-mail Group’ manages the e-mail list.

The e-mail group setup items are shown below.

Item Description

E-mail address E-mail address Name E-mail recipient’s name Description Additional explanation

Retrieving 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Ticketing Group’. 2) The list of e-mails is shown in the results table. 3) When you click the ‘Retrieve’ button at the bottom of the screen, the list of e-mail groups is updated. You can add/delete an e-mail group by clicking ‘Add/Delete’.

Adding 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Ticketing Group’. 2) The list of e-mails is shown in the results table. 3) To add an e-mail group, enter the ‘e-mail address’, ‘Name’, and ‘Description’ of the setup table, instead of entering the items from the results table. 4) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Add’ button.

Deleting 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Ticketing Group’. 2) The list of e-mails is shown in the results table. 3) Select the checkbox in the most front of the item to delete. 4) Delete a selected e-mail item by clicking the ‘Delete’ button.

5.1.3 Ticketing setup This is used to send a locational condition to a specified e-mail address when a specific alarm occurs.

The e-mail setup items are shown below.

Item Description

TARGET Target device to which an e-mail will be sent Total alarm list/Selected alarm list Total alarm list and selected alarm list Total e-mail list/Selected e-mail list Total e-mail list and selected e-mail list Title Title of an e-mail to send

Retrieving 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Ticketing Setup’. 2) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the Tree Viewer. The selected device is displayed in the ‘TARGET’ field. 3) Select the ‘Retrieve’ button. 4) The e-mail related setup information is displayed in the results table.

Adding 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Ticketing Setup’. 2) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the Tree Viewer. The selected device is displayed in the ‘TARGET’ field. 3) Select the ‘Retrieve’ button. 4) The e-mail related setup information is displayed in the results table. 5) Instead of selecting an item in the results table, select an alarm to add and an e-mail in the setup table and click the right arrow (‘>’) button. 6) Save the settings by clicking the ‘Add’ button.

Deleting 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Ticketing Setup’. 2) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the Tree Viewer. The selected device is displayed in the ‘TARGET’ field. 3) Select the ‘Retrieve’ button. 4) The e-mail related setup information is displayed in the results table. 5) Select the checkbox at the most front of the item to delete. 6) Delete a selected e-mail item by clicking the ‘Delete’ button.

5.1.4 Ticketing History This is used to retrieve the history of e-mail transmission.

The e-mail history retrieving items are shown below.

Item Description

TARGET Target device whose e-mail transmission history will be retrieved Alarm code Alarm code to retrieve E-mail address E-mail address to retrieve Result Transmission result of an e-mail to retrieve (Total/Success/Failure) Period Period when e-mail transmission history will be retrieved

Retrieving 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Ticketing History’  ‘E-mail History’. 2) Select an equipment (controller) to retrieve in the Tree Viewer. The selected device is displayed in the ‘TARGET’ field. 3) Enter search conditions. 4) Click the ‘Retrieve’ button.

5.1.5 Level/blocking control You can check the alarm level information including alarm ID, name and group.

The alarm control items are shown below.

Item Description Alarm severity Applied alarm severity (Critical, Major, Minor) Whether an alarm is allowed Whether an alarm is allowed (Allow, Inhibit) Applied controller Select a controller to apply.

[Alarm Severity Information]

Item Description Alarm number Alarm ID Alarm name Alarm name Group name - system: Alarm occurred in a controller - ap: Alarm occurred in an AP - wifi: Wi-Fi related alarm - security: Security related alarm - network: Network related alarm - etc.: Others

Item Description Alarm severity Alarm severity - Critical: Critical Faults - Major: Major Faults - Minor: Minor Faults Allow Alarm Allow Alarm (Allowed/Inhibit)

Retrieve alarm severity information 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘level/blocking control’ menu. 2) Select ‘Alarm Severity’ and ‘Allow Alarm’. 3) Select a controller to apply. 4) Click the ‘Save’ button.

5.1.6 Filter setup An operator can receive alarms selectively by specifying the desired alarms.

The alarm filter items are shown below.

Item Description Alarm filter group ALL/SYSTEM/PM/AP/WLAN/WIFI/SECURITY/NETWORK/ INTERFACE/SE Alarm filter severity Applied alarm severity (Critical, Major, Minor)

[Alarm Filter Information]

Item Description

Controller name Controller name IP address IP address of a controller Filter group Alarm filter group (ALL/SYSTEM/PM/AP/WLAN/WIFI/SECURITY/ NETWORK/INTERFACE/SE) Filter severity - Critical: Critical Faults - Major: Major Faults - Minor: Minor Faults Remarks Status information

Alarm filter setup 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘filter Set’ menu. 2) Select ‘Alarm Filter Group’ and ‘Alarm Filter Level’. 3) By using the checkbox on the left, select a controller to set up. 4) Click the ‘Save’ button.

5.1.7 User-defined Alarms The operator can create alarms by combining alarms or events already defined in the system based on specific conditions. The following user-defined alarm settings are available.

Item Description

ID ID of the user-defined alarm Alarm name Name of the user-defined alarm Type Type of the user-defined alarm. Available types include Count, Combine, Escalate, Threshold, and Compare. Base alarm System-defined alarm. These are combined to create user-defined alarms. Level Level of the defined alarm. Available levels include Critical, Major, and Minor. Display name Alarm name to display in the alarm display window. Description Description of the defined alarm Transmission option Specifies where the alarm should be transmitted. (Available options include Email and WEM.)

[Types]

Item Description

Count An alarm (APC down, AP down, Radio down) can be selected as a condition. The user-defined alarm is triggered if the alarm count exceeds a specified value within a specified period (days/hours/minutes). (Example: The user-defined alarm is triggered if ACP Down occurs 5 or more times in 1 day.) Combine Alarms (Channel Utilization, Noise Level, Rogue AP Detected, Interferer Detected) can be selected as conditions. The user-defined alarm is triggered if all of the specified alarms occur within a specified period (days/hours/minutes). (Example: The user-defined alarm is triggered if both the Channel Utilization and Noise Level alarms occur during 1 day.) Escalate An event (Call Quality, Noise Level, Packet Loss Rate, Packet Retry Rate, Channel Utilization, Rogue AP Detected, Interferer Detected) can be selected as a condition. The user-defined alarm is triggered if the specified event occurs. (Example: The user-defined alarm is triggered if the Rogue AP Detected event occurs.) Threshold An event (Call Quality, Noise Level, Packet Loss Rate, Packet Retry Rate, Channel Utilization, Rogue AP Detected, Interferer Detected) can be selected as a condition. The user-defined alarm is triggered if the specified event occurs and the value exceeds a specified value.

Item Description

(Example: The user-defined alarm is triggered if the Interferer Detected event occurs and the RSSI value exceeds the specified value.) Compare A string can be selected as a condition. The user-defined alarm is triggered if an event or an alarm containing the specified string occurs. (Example: The user-defined alarm is triggered if an event or an alarm containing 00:16:b7 occurs.)

Configuring User-defined Alarms 1) Select the ‘Operation Management’  ‘Alarms’  ‘User-defined Alarms’ menu. 2) Click the ‘Register’ button. 3) Specify a name and a type of the user-defined alarm. 4) Enter conditions according to the specified type. 5) Enter alarm information. Select Critical, Major, or Minor for Level according to the priority level of the alarm, and specify a name to display on the screen. 6) Specify the Email option if you wish to receive alarm notification by email.

Deleting User-defined Alarms 1) Select the ‘Operation Management’  ‘Alarms’  ‘User-defined Alarms’ menu. 2) Select a user-defined alarm to delete. 3) Click the ‘Delete’ button.

5.2 Software 5.2.1 Package management The package management uploads or downloads the software package of a controller or an AP to/from the WEM server or controller.

The setup items are shown below:

[Device]

Item Description

Device Select a controller or an AP.

[Package List]

Item Description

Name Controller or AP package name saved in WEM Size Size of controller or AP package saved in WEM Date Time when controller or AP package saved in WEM is updated

[Controller List]

Item Description

Name Name of a controller that will download a package from WEM Version Package version of the current controller 300 Series AP Version 300 Series AP package version of the controller 400 Series AP Version 400 Series AP package version of the controller Status Package download status

Setup 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘software’  ‘package Management’. 2) Select a controller or an AP in the Device. 3) Select a package from the package list to upload it to a device. If the file you want is not available, click the ‘Upload’ button and select a package you wish to upload to WEM. 4) Select a controller from which you want to download a package you selected. 5) When you click the ‘Download’ button, the package download is started and you can see the download progress in the Status bar.

5.2.2 Package upgrade This is used to apply a downloaded software package to a controller or an AP.

Its items are shown below.

[Device]

Item Description

Device Selects a controller, an AP, or a remote AP group.

When you select an AP, the Option/Category is displayed separately.

[Option/Category]

Item Description

Option Total or individual. Total means that all the APs in a controller are selected and Individual means that a specific AP is selected. Category Select Default, fast upgrade or pre-download. - Default: A specific package is downloaded to a specific controller and upgrade is performed when an AP is rebooted. - Fast upgrade: Upgrade is started once download is complete. - Pre-download: An AP is rebooted with a pre-download option. Forced upgrade Option enabled when Individual is selected - Enable: Enable forced upgrade. - Disable: Disable forced upgrade.

When you select a controller, the following items are displayed in the controller list.

[Controller List]

Item Description

Name Name of a controller whose package will be changed Version Package version of the current controller Status Package download status

When you select an AP and then select Total from the option, the following items are displayed in the controller list.

Item Description

Name Name of a controller whose package will be changed

Item Description

300 Series AP Version Name of the package of 300 Series AP set 400 Series AP Version Name of the package of 400 Series AP set Category Display AP upgrade method and a selected category. Status Upgrade progress status

[Package File]

Item Description

300 Series A package file of 300 Series AP to be upgraded 400 Series A package file of 400 Series AP to be upgraded

When you select an AP and then select Individual from the option, the following items are displayed in the controller list.

Item Description

Controller name Name of a controller whose package will be changed AP group AP group name AP name Selected AP name Operating Version Operating software version Backup Version Software version backed up Setup version Version of configured software Forced upgrade Whether to use forced upgrade Category Display AP upgrade method and a selected category. Status Upgrade progress status

[Package File]

Item Description

Package File Package file to upgrade

[Saving Control]

Item Description

Saving Control Package upgrade after saving/Package upgrade without saving

[Recovery Control]

Item Description

Recovery Control Recovery of previous setup/No recovery of previous setup

Setup 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Software’  ‘Package Management’. 2) Select a controller or an AP in the Device. 3) When selecting an AP, select Total or Individual as Option/Category by referring to the item remark column. 4) Select a target controller to upgrade. 5) When you click the ‘Retrieve’ button of Package File, a dialog box is displayed from where you can select a specific package. Select the package you want. 6) When you click the ‘Upgrade’ button, upgrade to the package is performed.

5.3 Setup 5.3.1 Data server Screen where you can set up the information required for data transmitting/receiving.

The information items are shown below.

Item Description

Data transmission Whether to use data transmission (Enable/Disable) Data server Data server setup (WEM/Other Server)

[Other Server Settings]

Item Description

IP address Server IP address Directory Directory where a file will be uploaded Port Server service port Connection account Server connection account Password Server connection password Confirm Password Server connection password (Confirm)

[Data Server Information]

Item Description

Controller name Controller name Controller IP address IP address of a controller Status FTP server enable/disable Server directory Upload path of a FTP server Server IP address IP address of a FTP server Connection account User ID of a FTP server Port Port number of a FTP server Remarks Status information

Setup 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘Set’  ‘Data Server’ menu. 2) Enter ‘Data Transmission’ and ‘Data Server’ information.  Select whether to use ‘Data Transmission’.  Select WEM or Other Server in ‘Data Server’.

 If you select Other Server, enter upload IP address/path and port number into ‘IP address’, ‘Directory’, and ‘Port’.  If you select Other Server, enter user account information into ‘Connection Account’ and ‘Password’. 3) By using the checkbox on the left, select a controller to set up. 4) Click the ‘Save’ button.

5.4 License The WEM can provide license-based management for the allowed number of WE WLAN APs and firewalls, Voice Quality Monitor (VQM) service range, and WE WLAN AP.

The license items are shown below.

[Server License Information]

Item Description

Number of accommodable Total number of controller/APs that can be managed after APC/AP registration in WEM Maximum number of users who Number of clients who can connect to WEM simultaneously can connect simultaneously Number of APCs being used Number of registered controllers Switch being used Number of registered switches Number of APs being used Number of registered APs

Retrieving license 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘License’ menu. 2) Display license related information.

Change license 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘License’ menu. 2) Click the ‘Change License’ button. 3) Select a license file to change and click the ‘Upload’ button. 4) After rebooting the WEM server, the change is successfully applied.

[APC License Information]

Item Description

APC name Controller name Number of APs Number of APs that can be registered VQM Whether to use VQM Firewall Whether to use firewall License list Type, remaining period, installation times information

Retrieving license 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘License’ menu. 2) Display license related information.

Change license 1) Select ‘Operation Management’  ‘License’ menu. 2) Click the ‘Change License’ button. 3) Enter a license key to change. 4) Click the ‘Apply’ button.

CHAPTER 6. Tools

This chapter describes external tools of WEM such as spectral analysis function, voice quality monitoring function, and packet capture function.

6.1 Spectrum Analyzer Radio frequency (RF) interference is unpredictable and cause problem for WLAN performance. It can originate from neighboring Wi-Fi networks or non-Wi-Fi sources, such as 2.4-GHz cordless phones, microwave ovens, analog video cameras and wireless telemetry systems. Spectrum analyzer provides a critical layer of visibility into non-802.11 sources of RF interference and their effects on WLAN performance. The spectrum analyzer remotely identifies RF interference, classifies its source and provides real-time analysis at the point of the problem.  Real time FFT: Wireless capture data converted into Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) and spectrum graph  Duty Cycle: Channel utilization rate and spectrum graph

Real-time Spectrum Analyzer 1) Select ‘Tools’  ‘Spectrum Analyzer’. 2) In the Tree Viewer, select AP to retrieve. Selected AP appears at the ‘Target Node’. 3) Click ‘Set’ button to open spectrum configuration window appears. 4) Set Wireless communication standards in the ‘Radio’ field. 5) Select ‘Real Time Configuration’ tab, and then set each item.  In the ‘Real-time Monitor Setup’ of ‘Real-time FFT’, select based on an average value or maximum value.  Select a spectrum type and spectrum search range in the ‘Spectrogram Monitor Setup’ of ‘Real-time FFT’.  Select a spectrum search range in the ‘Spectrogram Monitor Setup’ of ‘Channel Usage Rate’. 6) Click ‘Save’ button, save the settings. 7) If you click the ‘Run’ button in the main window of spectral analysis, the real-time monitoring is driven. Click the ‘Stop’ button to stop real time monitoring.

6.2 VQM VQM as Voice Quality Monitor provides the voice-related information. The operator may set the voice-related information of the controller system to the WEM server through the ‘Control’. The description of the received files is stored in the database and statistical information by using the data through the ‘Statistics’ can be obtained. In addition, VQM can obtain the data on the specific station now in use in real time in the ‘Monitoring. In ‘File History’, the voice information files are normally dealt with from the controller system and it can be checked whether they are stored in the database. The files received from the controller system cannot be properly handled for the reasons such as error in file format, and lack of data and the operator may check the history in the ‘File History’.

6.2.1 Control In the ‘Control’, the voice-related information of the controller system can be set to be transmitted to the WEM server and at the time file size, transmission interval, etc. can be set. In addition, ports and alarm occurring threshold values to be monitored can be set.

[General Items]

Item Description

Operation VQM enable/disable indicator Description Whether detailed matters are included in voice data Maximum Session Number Number of maximum media sessions to be monitored by VQM (1-2500) Inspection Cycle (5-60) The cycle at which the VQM brings media session information (Not the cycle at which the information file is transmitted from the controller to the WEM) Session Deletion Waiting Time If there is no media data, the waiting time to delete the session (15-60)

[Interface Items]

Item Description

Port Area (1-65535) The port area to be monitored by the VQM

[Alarm Items]

Item Description

Burst (30-93) Threshold value that generates alarm for burst Delay (1-1000) Threshold value that generates alarm for delay

Item Description

MOS (1.0-5.0) Threshold value that generates alarm for MOS R-Factor (30-93) Threshold value that generates alarm for R-Factor

[File Save]

Item Description

Save Information Whether to transmit the information collected by the VQM to the WEM Storage Size (1024-102400) The file size when the information file is transmitted to the WEM File Name Set the file prefix for classifying the controller. Saving Interval The interval at which the information file is transmitted to the WEM Saving Method The interval at which the information file is transmitted to the WEM Server Address The address of the server to transmit the information file (WEM address) Saving Location Directory to transmit the information file to Account ID Account ID to use when the information file is transmitted Password Password to use when the information file is transmitted

Figure 98. VQM Control

Viewing VQM Control 1) Select a controller in the tree. 2) Click the ‘Search’ button on the ‘Control’ screen.

Changing VQM Control 1) Change the item you want to change. 2) Click the ‘Set’ button on the ‘Control’ screen.

6.2.2 Monitoring In ‘Monitoring’, the voice information on a specific station in use can be checked in real time. The methods for viewing include IP address, MAC, username (username at wireless connection), telephone, etc. In the result window on the right side, you can check the result in a form of graph or table. If the station you want to view is not in user, the controller system responds as Not-OK, and the WEM displays there is no subject to view.

Figure 99. VQM Monitoring

Starting Monitoring 1) Select a control system or group you want to view in the tree. 2) Select a method for viewing in ‘Condition’. 3) Enter a subject that meets ‘Condition’ in the ‘SubCondition’. 4) Check an item you want to view in ‘Item’. 5) Set the viewing interval in the ‘Period’. 6) Click the ‘Start’ button.

Stopping Monitoring 1) Click the ‘Stop’ button. 2) Click the ‘Set’ button on the ‘Control’ screen.

Saving or Printing 1) Click the ‘Save’ button and enter the file name before clicking the ‘OK’ button. 2) After clicking the ‘Print’ button, perform the printing command as indicated on the screen.

6.2.3 Statistics In ‘Statistics’, the description on the voice-related statistics can be viewed based on the data received from the controller.

6.2.3.1 Call Summary In the ‘Call Summary’ tab, you can check the overall status. Statistical subjects may be a controller system and a group. The conditions may be designated by SSID, WLAN, and BSSID, and a specific station may be designated by using IP address, Username, MAC, and telephone as secondary conditions. The period during which the statistical value is viewed can be set by using the target period or time setting. In ‘MOS Status’ on the right top, the operator can set the threshold value to classify under the MOS and classify and indicate number of calls whose status is good and whose status is bad based on the threshold value. ‘Service Health’ on the bottom displays the number of calls by Mean Opinion Score (MOS) value in a bar graph and ‘Call Quality’ may show the progress of the MOS value depending on the time. ‘Problem Indicator’ shows the number of calls whose index is not good in a bar graph.

Figure 100. VQM Status Board

Viewing Statistical Value 1) Select the subject as a controller system or group in the tree. 2) Designate a subject as SSID, WLAN and BSSID in the ‘Conditions’ or a station with IP address, MAC, username, and telephone number. 3) Select the period to view in ‘Appointed Time’. 4) If you want to set a specific period, select ‘a designation date’ in the ‘Target Period’ and enter the time you want in the ‘Time Setting’. 5) Designate a threshold value with which calls whose status is good and bad are classified in ‘MOS Status’. 6) Click the ‘Search’ button.

6.2.3.2 Call Report In the ‘Call Report’ tab, you can make a report on the statistics.

Figure 101. VQM Report

Creating Report 1) To make a report with specific items, select an item you want in the ‘Items’ tab. 2) To make a report with a specific period, select an item you want in the ‘Period’ tab. 3) Designate a specific item to view in ‘Time Series’. 4) Click the ‘Search’ button.

6.2.3.3 Call Detail In the ‘Call Detail’ tab, the detailed information on a specific call can be viewed. In the ‘Call Report’ tab, click ‘Call Detail’ button on the call you want to see more in the list of calls appearing on the screen, the screen is switched to ‘Call Detail’ and the detailed information appears. In the Details screen, you can see the status of sound sources such as delay, echo, and noise and the call occurring time, telephone number, IP address, etc. In the table as shown below, you can check each indicators relating to the voice of the call.

Figure 102. Detailed Information on VQM

Viewing Details Click the ‘Call Detail’ button of the call you want to see in detail in the ‘Call Report’ screen.

6.2.4 History In ‘History’, the result of the process of the voice-related information file received from the controller can be viewed. If it is impossible to extract information for any reasons such as wrong file format received from the controller, the WEM processes the file failed and keeps the record.

Figure 103. VQM File History

Viewing File History 1) Select a controller system or group you want to see the file history from in the tree. 2) Select whether you will see only success-related files, only failure-related files or both files in ‘FTP Result’. 3) Select whether you will see only DB processing success-related files, only failure- related files or both in the ‘DB Insert’. 4) Enter the time that you want to see the file processing result in the ‘Start Time’ and ‘End Time’. 5) Click the ‘Search’ button.

6.3 Packet Capture 6.3.1 APC Packet Capture It provides a function of retrieving or configuring the packet capture information set in the controller.

Figure 104. APC Packet Capture

‘Packet Capture’ menu provides a feature to retrieve and set the packet capture information on the APC. Packet capture parameter are as follows:

Parameter Description

SERVICE STATUS Packet capture service status OPTION The target for packet capture (Station Only/AP Only/Station or AP/ Station and AP) Operation mode Packet capture operation mode. This must be set to remote-mode in order to access the packets of an APC from a remote PC.

[STATION]

Parameter Description

MAC address Set up the MAC address of a station where packet capture will be executed Status Packet capture service status

[AP]

Parameter Description

MAC address Set up the MAC address of an AP where packet capture will be executed Status Packet capture service status

Setting 1) Select ‘Tools’  ‘Packet Capture’. 2) Packet capture settings appears on the screen. 3) Select the service that user want to use packet capture in ‘SERVICE STATUS’ item. 4) Select ‘Option’ in ‘OPTION’ item. 5) Click ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Adding 1) Select ‘Tools’  ‘Packet Capture’. 2) Packet capture settings appears on the screen. 3) Click ‘Set’ button and select STATION/AP and enter the MAC address of the device. 4) Click ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

Activating/Deactivating 1) Select ‘Tools’  ‘Packet Capture’. 2) Packet capture settings appears on the screen. 3) Select the check box of the STATION/AP which you want activating/deactivating. 4) Click ‘Act/Deact’ button to save the settings.

General The ‘General’ menu monitors and checks the operation status and its functions, and resources on the WEM server, and client side status, and also provides the various additional functions required to set up and control the operating environment.

The ‘General’ menu can be distinguished as follows:  Surveillance  Monitoring  Resource Manager  Statistics  Database Manager  Self Diagnosis  Scheduler

6.3.2 AP Packet Capture It provides a function of viewing or configuring the packet capture information set in the AP. The packet capture items are as follows:

Figure 105. AP Packet Capture

Item Description

Target APC APC where an AP whose packet will be captured Monitor IP IP of the equipment which can receive the captured information from the wirelessly connected AP (PC or laptop)

[AP]

Item Description

Filter Enters a condition for filtering an AP to be retrieved. ex) If AB is entered, information on all APs whose name has AB is displayed. Stopping Capture of All Stops the captures of all APs which are set to be captured. APs

[Capture AP]

Item Description

Name Name of the AP to which packet capture will be performed

Item Description

MAC Address MAC address of the AP to which packet capture will be performed Capture Status Capture status of the selected AP Operating Status Operating status of the selected AP

Setup 1) Select the ‘Tools’  ‘Packet Capture’  ‘AP’ Packet Capture menu. 2) The packet capture-related configuration status is displayed on the screen. 3) Select the APC to use the packet capture service in ‘Target APC’. To use the APC, you must select the desired APC by using the Tree menu. 4) Enter the condition of the AP you want to select in ‘Filter’. 5) Select the AP to capture in the item and then it is automatically registered in the right capture AP. 6) Press the ‘Start’ button to start capturing. 7) Press the ‘Stop’ button to stop capturing. 8) Press the ‘Refresh’ button and then the present status is refreshed. 9) Press the ‘Stop All AP Captures’ button and then you can stop the captures of all APs belonging to the APC if the APs other than those currently selected are being captured.

Application to Release Capturing 1) Select the ‘Tools’  ‘Packet Capture’  ‘AP’ Packet Capture menu. 2) The packet capture-related configuration status is displayed on the screen. 3) Select the APC to use the packet capture service in ‘Target APC’. To use the APC, you must select the desired APC by using the Tree Viewer. To see the TreeViewer, use the Show Tree Viewer button on the right top. 4) Check an AP you want to remove in ‘Caputer AP’. 5) To release capturing, select the item of the AP in ‘Capture AP’ and then the item is removed.

6.3.3 Using Packet Capture Program If the packet capture is used, the packet capture program must be used in the user’s PC. To use Wireshark, follow the steps below:

Setup 1) Run Wireshark. 2) Open Capture Option in the program. 3) Set an interface of the option to monitor to be remote and set the IP of the APC for the APC packet capture and the IP of the AP for the AP packet capture. 4) Press the ‘OK’ button and then the ‘Start’ button. 5) The capture starts and the message is displayed. 6) To stop, press the ‘Stop live capture’ button.

CHAPTER 7. General

The ‘General’ menu monitors and checks the operation status and its functions, and resources on the WEM server, and client side status, and also provides the various additional functions required to set up and control the operating environment.

The ‘General’ menu can be distinguished as follows:  Surveillance  Monitoring  Resource Manager  Database Manager  Self Diagnosis  Scheduler

7.1 Surveillance 7.1.1 Network Status ‘Network Status’ menu provides function to check network status of the nodes (AP, APC and Switch) periodically.

The parameters for the network status are as follows

Parameter Description

NE INDEX NE registered location NE TYPE Type of the NE (AP/APC/Switch) LOCATION NE Group Location MASTER IP ADDRESS The primary IP address of the NE VICE IP ADDRESS The vice IP address of the NE PING STATUS Using ICMP ping state SNMP STATUS SNMP agent state

Network State Retrieving 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Surveillance’  ‘Network Status’ to open Network status window. 2) Set the search conditions. ‘Target’ section, and then you want to look up the tree viewer from the main screen of the NE. Enter or select the ‘IP Address’ section you want to look up the IP address of the NE. 3) Click ‘Search’ button. 4) The search results will be displayed in the result table. it is depending on the search conditions set by user. 5) Real-time network status for specific Device displayed. 6) Click ‘Get’ button to update. 7) User can set interval in seconds (Min: 10 sec) to update the status periodically

7.1.2 Process Status In this section provides information about WEM Process running status. The Process Status function allows user to view the status of the processes running in the WEM server and stop or restart them. If a process is abnormal, user should stop and restart it. The WEM server maintains a process list. If a process is stopped in an abnormal way, the WEM sever restarts it automatically.

Process management parameters are as follows:

Parameter Description

NAME Displays Name of the Process STATUS Displays the status of the process (Running/Stop) START TIME Displays the start time of the process if it is running. RESTART COUNTs Displays number of times the process is restarted PROCESS ID Displays the ID of the process if it is running CPU (%) Displays percentage of CPU Utilization of the Running process MEMORY USED/TOTAL (Mbyte) Displays Total/Used Memory of the Running process THREADs Displays the number of Threads used for running process DB CONNECTIONs USED/TOTAL Displays DB Connections (Used/Total) summary of the Running process LOG LEVEL Displays at what level logs are created for the process.

Process Status 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Surveillance’  ‘Process Status’ menu to open running process window. 2) Click the ‘Search’ button to refresh the status of running process by recent information.

Stop and Restart the Process 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Surveillance’  ‘Process Status’ menu to open current running process window. 2) Select the process that user wants to stop or restart. 3) Click ‘Stop’ or ‘Restart’ button to perform the action.

Setting Log Level The log level of the process are as follows, and higher log level log information is recorded in detail.

Log level: CONFIG > INFO > WARNING > SEVERE > OFF  OFF: does not capture the log  SEVERE: Information required to carry out the program  WARNING: program to perform the low level of information  INFO: The program to perform most of the information is displayed  CONFIG: Not used

Perform the following steps to set the log level.

1) Select ‘General’  ‘Surveillance’  ‘Process Status’ to open current running process window. 2) Select the process that user wants to configure log level. 3) In the ‘Log level’ filed, Choose the desired log level in the drop down box. 4) Click ‘modify’ button to apply/save the settings.

7.2 Monitoring ‘Monitoring’ menu displays the CPU and Memory status of the Network, Network Interface of the state specific intervals.

Select ‘General’  ‘Monitoring’. The WEM resources of the state from the server periodically by measuring the state graph.

The parameters are as follows:

Item Description

CPU Usage (%) Current usage rate of database CPU Usage History CPU usage history after monitoring Memory Usage (%) Current memory usage rate Memory Usage History Memory usage history after monitoring Network Usage History Network usage history after monitoring

7.3 Resource Manager The Resource Manager function monitors the status of the resources of the WEM server such as CPU, file system, memory, and database. user can set the alarm thresholds for each resource and the interval that the WEM server monitors each resource.

7.3.1 CPU The CPU function allows user to view the usage of each CPU in the WEM server and set the alarm thresholds for CPU. If the server has more than one CPU, usage of each CPU is displayed. If the usage of a CPU of the WEM server exceeds a threshold, the corresponding alarm is generated. The parameter of CPU are as follows:

Parameter Description

RESOURCE Displays the ID of the CPU. USAGE (%) Displays the current usage of the CPU. USER (%) Displays the CPU usage by user processes. SYSTEM (%) Displays the CPU usage by system processes. WAIT IO (%) Displays the CPU usage used for waiting for available IO resources. IDLE (%) Displays the ratio of idle state.

Retrieve CPU status 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Resource Manager’  ‘CPU’ to CPU status windows. 2) The CPU Status Results table is updated automatically (interval of 5 sec). Click Get button to refresh CPU status. 3) By clicking ‘Average’ button, the detailed information of each CPU ID is displayed.

Threshold Setting 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Resource Manager’  ‘CPU’. 2) Set the threshold value of CPU by each alarm level in ‘Threshold’ item. 3) Select whether to apply the alarm occurrence (Allow/Inhibit) in ‘InhibitFlag’ item, when the alarm is occurred more than threshold value. 4) Click ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

7.3.2 Memory The Memory function allows user to view the usage of the memory in the WEM server and set the alarm thresholds for memory. Memory usage is the percentage of the currently used memory size to the total memory size. If the memory usage of the WEM server exceeds a threshold, the corresponding alarm is generated The parameter of memory are as follows:

Parameter Description

RESOURCE Displays the type of the memory. CURRENT STATUS (%) Displays the current usage of the memory. TOTAL SIZE (MBytes) Displays the total size of the memory in units of MB. USED SIZE (MBytes) Displays the used size of the memory in units of MB. FREE SIZE (MBytes) Displays the unused size of the memory in units of MB.

Retrieve Memory Status 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Resource Manager’  ‘Memory’ to open Memory status window. 2) The Memory Status Results table is updated automatically (interval of 5 sec). Click ‘Get’ button to refresh Memory status

Setting Threshold Value 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Resource Manager’  ‘Memory’ to open Memory status window. 2) Set the threshold value of memory by each alarm level in ‘Threshold’ item. 3) Select whether to apply the alarm occurrence (Allow/Inhibit) in ‘InhibitFlag’ item, when the alarm is occurred more than threshold value. 4) Click ‘Set’ button to save the setting.

7.3.3 File System The File System function allows user to view the usage of the file systems in the WEM server and set the alarm thresholds for each file system. The usage information is displayed in detail for each file system. If the usage of a file system of the WEM server exceeds a threshold, the corresponding alarm is generated. The parameter of file system are as follows:

Parameter Description

RESOURCE Displays the type of the file system. CURRENT STATUS (%) Displays the current usage of the file system. TOTAL SIZE (MBytes) Displays the total size of the file system in units of MB. USED SIZE (MBytes) Displays the used size of the file system in units of MB. FREE SIZE (MBytes) Displays the unused size of the file system in units of MB.

Retrieve File System State 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Resource Manager’  ‘File System’ to open File System status window. 2) The File System Status Results table is updated automatically (interval of 5 sec). Click Get button to refresh File system status.

Setting Threshold Value 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Resource Manager’  ‘File System’ to open File System status window. 2) Set the threshold value of File System by each alarm level in ‘Threshold’ item. 3) Select whether to apply the alarm occurrence (Allow/Inhibit) in ‘InhibitFlag’ item, when the alarm is occurred more than the threshold value. 4) Click ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

7.3.4 DB Usage The Database function allows user to view the usage of the databases in the WEM server and set the alarm thresholds for each database. If the usage of a database of the WEM server exceeds a threshold, the corresponding alarm is generated. Database parameters are as follows:

Parameter Description

RESOURCE Displays the type of the database CURRENT STATUS (%) Displays the current usage of the database TOTAL SIZE (MBytes) Displays the total size of the database in units of MB. USED SIZE (MBytes) Displays the used size of the database in units of MB. FREE SIZE (MBytes) Displays the unused size of the database in units of MB.

Retrieve Database State 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Resource Manager’  ‘DB Usage’ to open DB Usage status window. 2) The DB Usage Status Results table is updated automatically (interval of 5 sec). Click Get button to refresh File system status.

Setting Threshold Value 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Resource Manager’  ‘DB Usage’ menu. 2) Set the threshold value of DB usage by each alarm level in ‘Threshold’ item. 3) Select whether to apply the alarm occurrence (Allow/Inhibit) in ‘InhibitFlag’ item, when the alarm is occurred more than the threshold value. 4) Click ‘Set’ button to save the settings.

7.3.5 Network Interface ‘Network Interface’ menu provides to retrieve information on each network interface of WEM server.

The descriptions of the parameters are as follows:

Parameter Description

RESOURCE Network Interface type IP ADDRESS Interface IP address of WEM server IN PACKET COUNTs (Bytes) Size of packet received through the interface IN ERROR Count of error packet received through the interface OUT PACKET COUNTs (Bytes) Size of packet sent through the interface OUT ERROR Count of error packet sent through the interface OUT COLLISION Count of collision packet

Retrieve Network Interface State 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Resource Manager’  ‘Network Interface’ menu. 2) Displays the Network Interface’s status.

7.4 Database Manager 7.4.1 Backup The Backup function allows user to back up the database automatically or manually. For manual backup, you can specify the backup range, backup device (location), and backup file name. For auto backup, you can register the daily, weekly, and monthly backup schedules. The description of the output parameters are as follows:

Parameter Description

Type Backup range (Group/Table) Execution Backup execution mode (Auto/Manual) Location Backup device (Hard Disk) Path The path of the backup file File Name The name of the backup file Schedule Auto backup schedules - Type: Monthly/Weekly/Daily - DATE/DAY/HOUR/MINUTE Total Tables Total table lists (when the type is Table) Selected Tables Selected table lists (when the type is Table)

Manual Backup 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Database Manager’  ‘Backup’ menu. 2) Select any one of ‘Group’ or ‘Table’ option in the ‘Type’ field 3) In the ‘Execution’ field, select the ‘Manual’. 4) Enter the backup file name at the ‘File Name’ field. 5) If user choose ‘Table option in the backup type’, then select items in Total Table list and press arrow button to move the items to selected Tables’. 6) Click ‘Set’ button, to execute the manual backup.

Automatic backup 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Database Manager’  ‘Backup’. 2) Select any one of ‘Group’ or ‘Table’ option in the ‘Type’ field. 3) Select ‘Auto’ backup method in ‘Execution’ field. 4) Enter the backup file name in the ‘File Name’ item. 5) Select schedule type daily or weekly or monthly. 6) If user choose Table option in the backup type, then select items in Total Table list and press arrow button to move the items to selected tables. 7) Click ‘Set’ button, to save auto backup schedule.

7.4.2 Schedule The Schedule function allows user to view the backup schedules and delete a registered backup schedule. Schedule parameter are as follows:

Parameter Description

Type Backup range (Database, Group, Table) Operator The operator who registered the backup schedule Period Backup period type (Daily, Weekly, Monthly Time Backup start time Information Backup script Register Time The time that the backup schedule was registered

Backup Schedule View and Deleting 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Database Manager’  ‘Schedule’. 2) Enter search condition in the search condition input table.  Select the backup rage (All, database, group, table) in ‘Type’.  Select the backup period (All, Monthly, Weekly, Daily) in ‘Period’. 3) Click ‘Search’ button. 4) Registered an automatic backup schedule results appears in the output table. 5) Delete Auto Backup, Select auto backup schedules that user want to delete in the Results table, then Click on Delete button.

7.4.3 Backup File ‘Backup File’ function allows user to view or delete the database backup information and restore a database using the corresponding backup information The descriptions of the result table parameters are as follows:

Parameter Description

File Location Location where the backup file is stored File Name Backup file name Backup Time Time when the backup file was created Size Size of the backup file

You can restore the database using the backup file, viewing detailed information, deletion as shown below:

1) Select ‘General’  ‘Database Manager’  ‘Backup File’. 2) Select backup file type (All, Database, Group, Table) at ‘Type’ field. 3) Click ‘Search’ button.

4) The backup file information is displayed in the result table. 5) Select one of the backup files and select the desired button.  If you want to restore the database, click ‘Restore’ button.  If you want to check the detailed information, click ‘Detail’ button.  If you want to delete the backup file, click ‘Delete’ button.

7.4.4 History The History function allows you to view the backup and restore histories. The parameters of history are as follows:

Parameter Description

Mode Type of the history you want view (Backup/Restore) Exec Backup execution type (Auto/Manual) File Location Location where the backup file is stored File Name Backup file name Execute Time Start time of the backup/restore operation

Below is the procedure to display the backup/recovery history

1) Select ‘General’  ‘Database Manager’  ‘History’. 2) Enter the search conditions in the search input table.  Select the history command (Backup/Restore) in the ‘Command’ field.  Select the type (All, Database, Group, Table) in the ‘Type’ field.  Select the operator ID in the ‘Operator’ field.  Select the search period in the ‘Period’ field. 3) Select ‘Search’ button. 4) The backup/recovery history information displayed in the result table.

7.4.5 Storage Period Storage Period function allows you to set the storage period for PM, FM, and SM raw data, and hourly, weekly, and monthly statistics data in the databases of the server. Data is deleted automatically according to the periods configured. The parameters for retention are as follows:

Parameter Description

Raw Data Period Raw data collected in the storage cycle Hourly Data Period Hourly Stats for data retention cycle Daily Data Period Daily Statistics data retention cycle Monthly Data Period Monthly statistical data retention cycle Oper. Data Period Operation log data retention cycle

Parameter Description

Must perform the following steps to view or set the storage period.

1) Select ‘General’  ‘Database Manager’  ‘Storage Period’. 2) Displays storage period information of each items. When you click the ‘Search’ button, retention time information is updated 3) To change the storage period for a type of data, select a storage period in the corresponding Period box and click Set button.

7.4.6 Diagnosis The DB Status (Diagnosis) function diagnoses the current status of the database automatically. The diagnosis results can be Normal, Abnormal, or Fixed Diagnosis parameter are as follows:

[DB Status]

Parameter Description

DB Test Name DB diagnosis item Result DB diagnosis result (Normal, Fixed, Abnormal) - NORMAL: normal - FIXED: fixed problem - ABNORMAL: abnormal Reason Abnormal) Reason

Performing Diagnosis (DB) Status

1) Select ‘General’  ‘Database Manager’  ‘Diagnosis’. 2) The database self-diagnosis is performed and the results are displayed on the DB Status (Diagnosis) Window 3) By clicking Search button, the database self-diagnosis is performed again and the results are displayed.

7.5 Self Diagnosis The Self Diagnosis function displays the RMI and DB connection status and event channel status of the processes running in the WEM server Self Diagnosis parameters are as follows:

[IPC Status]

Parameter Description

PROCESS NAME Name of the Process DB STATUS The connection status between process and the database - Normal: , Abnormal: RMI STATUS The connection status between process and the RMI - Normal: , Abnormal:

[Event Channel Status]

Parameter Description

PUBLISHER The process that distributes events LINK STATUS The status of the link between processes. - Normal: , Abnormal: SUBSCRIBER (ID) The process that receives events.

Self Diagnosis Retrieving 1) Select ‘General’  ‘Self Diagnosis’ menu. 2) IPC status and Event Channel status displayed in the output screen. 3) If you click Test on the Self Diagnosis window, the event channel status and IPC status are tested and the results are updated.

CHAPTER 8. Security

The security function allows you, as an administrator, to add, modify, search, and delete an operator so that only permitted operator can connect to the WEM system. You can also restrict the privilege and search various histories for an operator. The ‘Security’ menu can be distinguished as follows:  User Manager  Change Password  Group Manager  IP Manager  Login History  Operation History

8.1 User Manager 8.1.1 User Manager The User Manager function allows you to set, view, modify, and delete the operator ID, operator information, privilege, and command range for each operator. The parameters for the user management are as follows:

Parameter Description

User ID Operator ID Privilege Operator Level (All/Administrator/Operator/Monitor/Guest/Lobby Ambassador) Status User’s status (All/Enable/Disable/Lockout/Password Initialized) Group Operator group. Each group has its own NE to manage. The operator of the highest level should select ‘Default group’.

User ID and Input Password

A user ID can be 5 to 20 characters long and a password can be a combination of alphabets and numbers and must be 8 to 12 characters long.

Restrictions for changing password The password can be changed once a day, you cannot use recently used password.

Searching Users 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘User Manager’  ‘User Manager’ to open user manager menu window. 2) Currently registered users information are displayed in the result table. 3) Enter the search criteria to search for specific conditions. You can search by group, ID privileged, state-specific, etc. 4) Click ‘Search’ button. 5) The search results will be displayed in the result table. 6) Select an operator in the Results table, the detailed information for the selected operator is displayed on the User Profile window right to the Results table.

User Registration 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘User Manager’  ‘User Manager’ menu. 2) Click ‘Add’ button. 3) The operator registration window appears on the right side of the window. 4) Enter operator information.  Enter the operator user ID, password in the ‘User ID’, ‘Password’ and ‘Re- Password’ item.  Setting user level at the ‘Privilege’. Set NE Group ‘Group’ claim that user can be managed.  Enter the login session count single or multiple (Same User ID can be used simultaneously for different user login access if multiple login type selected). 5) By clicking ‘OK’ button, the result of registration will be shown in the result table.

Modifying User Information 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘User Manager’  ‘User Manager’. 2) Select a user to change from the results table. 3) Click ‘Modify’ button. 4) A window to modify the user information appears at the setting table on the right side of the window. 5) Change the user information.  Setting operator level at the ‘Privilege’.  Set ‘Group’ claim that can be managed by the operator in the NE group.  ‘Status’ claim to the operator state.  ‘Select the Login type (Single or Multiple)  Enter e-mail and phone number, etc. 6) By clicking ‘OK’ button, to modify the information and update in the result table.

Delete User Information 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘User Manager’  ‘User Manager’. 2) Select a user to delete from the result table. 3) Click ‘Delete’ button. 4) When the password input window appears, enter the user’s password. 5) By clicking ‘OK’ button, the changed information is reflected and displayed in the result table. At this time, a client who is logged in with the deleted user ID will be terminated forcefully.

8.1.2 Command Manager The Command Manager function allows user to view a list of the commands that an WEM operator can perform and set the privilege to access to menu and command for each operator.

Restricting menu by user 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘User Manager’  ‘Command Manager’. 2) Select User ID and Click Search button 3. 3) Search results are displayed and user can view the commands allowed to selected User ID. 4) Operator can add/modify/remove commands for specific user ID. 5) Click Save button to save the settings.

8.2 Change Password This function allows you to change the password of an user who is currently logged in.

Change Password 1) Selecting ‘Security’  ‘Change Password’, to open the changing password window. 2) To change the password, enter the old password, new password, and new password again for confirmation in the Change Password window 3) Click ‘OK’ button to change password.

Operator password

A user password can be a combination of alphabets and numbers and must be 8 to 12 characters long.

Restrictions for changing password The password can be changed once a day, you cannot use recently used password.

8.3 Group Manager The Group Manager function allows you to make a grouping for network elements for efficient and easier management. The parameters for the group management are as follows:

Parameter Description

Group Name The group name of the network Configuration Info. Configuration Information User List User list of registered group Comment Comment

Search Group 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘Group Manager’. 2) The information of the currently registered group is displayed in the result table. 3) Click ‘Search’ button to refresh the registered group information. 4) Select the Group to check the detailed information 5) The detailed information of the selected group is displayed on the right side of the window.

Add a Group 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘Group Manager’. 2) Click ‘Add’ button. 3) The Register Group window is displayed to the right of the Results table. Enter the group name and select the elements to include to the group. Click OK button on the Register Group window. Check whether the group you added is displayed in the Results table.

Modify Group Information 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘Group Manager’. 2) Select the group you want to modify in the Results table. However, you cannot modify the default group. 3) Check whether the detailed information for the selected group is displayed at the right to the Results table. 4) Click Modify button at the bottom of the Group Manager window. Change the elements to include to the selected group on the Change Group Information window. 5) Click OK button on the Change Group Information window.

Delete a Group 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘Group Manager’. 2) Select the group you want to delete in the Results table. However, you cannot delete the default group. 3) Click Delete button at the bottom of the Group Manager window. 4) Click OK button in the confirm message box displayed. 5) The changed information is reflected and displayed in the result table.

8.4 IP Manager The IP Manager function allows user to set whether to permit log-in for each client IP address and manage the number of sessions that can be opened at the same time. The parameters for IP management are as follows:

Parameter Description

IP Address IP address of the wireless terminal Login Allowance Sets whether to permit log-in for the IP address. If set to Allow, the operator can log in to the system from that IP address. If set to Deny, the operator cannot log in from that IP address. - Allow: Login from the registered IP is allowed. - Deny: Login from the registered IP is not allowed. Sessions The maximum number of sessions that can be opened simultaneously from the IP address when Login Allowance is set to Allow. Description Description of the IP address

Searching the IP 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘IP Manager’ menu. 2) This shows information about the IP addresses which are currently registered. 3) Enter the search conditions at ‘Login Allowance’ and ‘IP Address’ items. 4) Click ‘Search’ button. 5) The search results will be displayed in the result table. 6) Enter IP address at the ‘Select’ item to view detailed information. 7) The detailed IP information of the selected group is displayed on the right side of the window.

Registering an IP 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘IP Manager’. 2) Click ‘Add’ button. 3) The IP registration window appears on the setting table of the right side. 4) Enter IP information.  Enter the IP address at the ‘IP Address’ field.  At ‘Login Allowance’ field, Choose Allow or Deny.  At ‘Session’ field, enter the number of sessions that can be logged in simultaneously. 5) By clicking ‘OK’ button, the registered IP information is displayed on the searching result table. However, if the ‘Login Allowance’ is set to ‘Deny’, the client that was being operated in the IP address is forced to terminate.

Modify the IP Address 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘IP Manager’. 2) In ‘Select’ field, select IP address to change in the result table. 3) Click ‘Modify’ button. 4) The IP changing window appears. 5) Modify IP Information.  At ‘Login Allowance’ field, Choose Allow to Deny.  At ‘Session’ field, enter the number of sessions that can be logged in simultaneously. 6) By clicking ‘OK’ button, the registered IP information is displayed on the searching result table. However, if the ‘Login Allowance’ is set to ‘Deny’, the client that was being operated in the IP address is forced to terminate.

Deleting an IP 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘IP Manager’. 2) At ‘Select’ field, select the IP address to delete in the result table. 3) Click ‘Delete’ button. 4) The deletion confirmation window appears, click ‘OK’ button. 5) The changed information is reflected and displayed in the result table. However, if any client is currently operated in the IP address being deleted, the client will be forced to terminate.

8.5 Login History The Login History function allows user to search the database of WEM server for the operators who connected to and operated the system and the operators that are in a session currently.

8.5.1 Login History The Login History function allows user to view the login and logout history of the users. You can view the history of all the login tries to the WEM for each user. The parameters for the login history are as follows:

Parameter Description

User ID The ID of the logged-in user IP Address The IP address of the client Login Time The time that the user logged in Logout Time The time that the user logged out Success/Fail Displays whether the user logged in successfully or not. Login Fail Reason Displays the reason if the login failed. Logout Status Displays the logout status

Searching the Login History 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘Login History’  ‘Login History’. 2) Enter the search conditions in the search condition input table (The search conditions are user ID, IP address, login success/fail, and period.). 3) Click ‘Search’ button. 4) The login history search results are displayed in the result table. 5) Click the ‘Save’ button to save the searched data in an Excel file or text file.

8.5.2 Login Session The Logon Session function allows user to search the information of for the users who are being logged in to the WEM server and close a specific session forcibly if necessary. The parameters for the logon session are as follows:

Parameter Description

User ID The ID of the logged-in user. Privilege The level of the logged-in user IP Address The IP address of the client Login Time The time that the user logged in

Searching the Login Session 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘Login History’  ‘Login Session’. 2) The sessions that are currently logged in are displayed. Click the ‘Search’ button to search the logged in session information again. 3) Select the session that you want to close forcibly in the Results table. Click Delete button on the Logon Session window. The selected session is closed forcibly. 4) Check whether the session you closed forcibly is deleted from the Results table.

8.6 Operation History The Operation History function allows user to search the database of the WEM server for various operation histories. The search conditions are User ID, Function, Message, Command, and Period. The parameters for the operation log are as follows:

Parameter Description

User ID The ID of the Logged in user Target The target on which the command was executed Function The WEM block that used the command. Message The type of the command Request/Response Time The time that the command was requested/Executed IP Address The IP address of the client that executed the command Command The command that was executed. Result Command execution result Fail Reason The reason of the failed command Additional Info The parameters used when the command was executed.

Searching the Operation History 1) Select ‘Security’  ‘Operation History’. 2) Select the system for which you want to search the operation history in the Tree View. The selected system is displayed on the Target field in the input table. 3) Enter the search conditions you want, such as Period, User ID, Function, Message, Command, in the input table.  Enter a operator ID in the ‘User ID’ field.  Select the type in the ‘Function’ field.  Select the command type separator in the ‘Message’ field.  Enter the command in the ‘Command’ field.  Set the search period in the ‘Period’ field. 4) Click ‘Search’ button. 5) The operation log search results are displayed in the result table. 6) Click the ‘Save’ button to save the searched data in an Excel file or a text file.

CHAPTER 9. Help

Help is used to view the following information of the WEM server. The server information shows package version and build date.

Figure 106. WEM Help Window

ANNEX A. Alarm List

Cross check all the description which are not clear.

Alarm Code Alarm Name Description

856 Software Down A specific software block is abnormal. 863 CPU Load Alarm This occurs if the CPU usage rate of the system is higher than the set threshold. 864 Memory Usage Alarm This occurs if the memory usage rate of the system is higher than the set threshold. 865 Disk Usage Alarm This occurs if the disk usage rate of the system is higher than the set threshold. 866 Fan RPM Alarm This occurs if the fan level of the system is higher than the set threshold. 867 System Temperature An alarm that occurs if the temperature of the system Alarm exceeds the set threshold. 868 System Thermal An alarm that occurs if the temperature of the system Runaway normal operating the set threshold. 877 DHCP Sever Connect This alarm occurs when the communication between the Failure DHCP server and the system. 878 DNS Server Connect This alarm occurs when the communication between the Failure DNS server and the system. 879 NTP Server Connect This alarm occurs when the communication between the Failure NTP server and the system. 931 Fan Fail alarm This alarm occurs when the operation speed (rpm) out of range in the fan operation status. 936 Temperature Sensor It occurs when a temperature sensor increases Fail abnormally. 937 Power Module Fail It occurs when a power supply module increases abnormally. 945 DISK Full This occurs if the disk usage is 99 % or higher. 946 DISK Rate High This occurs if the disk usage rate of the system is higher than the set threshold. This alarm occurs when disk usage rate is more than 1 MBytes/sec and continue for more than 60 minutes.

Alarm Code Alarm Name Description

947 DISK Rate High This occurs if the disk usage rate of the system is higher (Shortterm) than the set short term threshold. This alarm occurs when disk usage rate is more than 50 MBytes/sec and continue for more than 5 minutes. 1001 Duplicated IP This alarm occurs when IP address conflict. 1002 No Radio This alarm occurs when all BSS of the AP are deleted and the mobile service is impossible. 1013 AP BSS Down This alarm occurs when the beacon of the specific BSS is not sensed for the predetermined time. 1016 AP Down In case when AP and connection were cut off, or a shutdown made the AP connection link compulsorily, AP down message happened, and AP and connection were again recommenced, AP Down is lifted. 1023 AP CPU Load High This occurs if the CPU load rate of the AP is higher than 90 % the set threshold. 1025 AP MEM Usage High This occurs if the memory usage rate of the AP is higher than 70 % the set threshold. 1027 Monitor Device Fail This alarm occurs if the system with RF monitor device has communication filature for the predetermined time. 1031 Radio (2.4G or 5G) TX This alarm occurs in case the obstacle to the failure specification Radio (2.4 G or 5 G) happens and the relevant airwave Tx doesn’t accomplish. 1041 AP Disk usage high This alarm occurs in case of exceeding 70 % in which the usage value of AP user disk (configs) is the Threshold value an alarm happens. 1103 CAC Minor Calls This alarm occurs when I generate the minor alarm threshold which the Radio of AP sets particularly over during the call try and the bids falls into the threshold or less. 1104 CAC Major Calls This alarm occurs when I generate the major alarm threshold which the Radio of AP sets particularly over during the call try and the bids falls into the threshold or less, the alarm this is lifted. 1175 CLUSTER APC Lost In case the connection with APC comprising CLUSTER Connection with the happening alarm among CLUSTER operation is cut off, I happen. 1177 VCC Connection Down This alarm occurs when SCME connection for the VCC (Voice Call Continuity) is failure. 1221 Radius Servers Failed This alarm occurs when the all RADIUS server occur communication failure. 1301 NET Link Dn This alarm occurs when interface link is down. 1485 NFM Restart This alarm occurs when the forwarding engine is restart.

Alarm Code Alarm Name Description

2001 EMS Process Alarm This alarm occurs when WEM server process goes [Server Process Down] down. 2002 EMS Resource Alarm This alarm occurs when hard disk usage rate exceeds [HDD] the threshold. 2003 EMS Resource Alarm This alarm occurs when database usage rate exceeds [DB] the threshold. 2004 EMS Resource Alarm This alarm occurs when memory usage rate exceeds the [Memory] threshold. 2006 Protocol Status Communication fail: TL1/SNMP/…. [Communication Fail: TL1/SNMP/…} 2007 Protocol Status Communication fail: ping fail. [Communication Fail: Ping] 2008 EMS Resource Alarm This alarm occurs when CPU usage rate exceeds the [CPU] threshold.

ANNEX A. Open Source Announcement

Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under the Mozilla Public License (MPL), the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL) and BSD License etc.

Acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)

The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the LGPL. You may obtain the complete Corresponding Source code from us for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product by sending email to: [email protected]

If you want to obtain the complete Corresponding Source code in the physical medium such as CD-ROM, the cost of physically performing source distribution may be charged. You may also find a copy of the source at http://opensource.samsung.com/

This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.

Below is the list of components covered under GNU General Public License, the GNU Lesser General Public License and BSD License etc.

Component License

Apache Jakarta Commons BeanUtils Apache License 1.1 Apache Jakarta Commons Digester Apache License 1.1 Apache Jakarta Commons Discovery Apache License 1.1 Apache Jakarta Commons EL Apache License 1.1 Apache Tomcat Apache License 1.1 Apache Xerces Java XML Parser Apache License 1.1 Apache Xerces Java XML Parser Apache License 2.0 Apache Ant Apache License 2.0

Component License

Apache Axis2/Java Apache License 2.0 Apache Commons Collections (for Apache Directory Studio) Apache License 2.0 Apache Commons FileUpload Apache License 2.0 Apache Commons Logging (for Apache Directory Studio) Apache License 2.0 Apache Geronimo Apache License 2.0 Apache Jakarta Commons Codec Apache License 2.0 Apache Jakarta Commons Digester Apache License 2.0 Apache Jakarta Commons Email Apache License 2.0 Apache Jakarta Commons IO Apache License 2.0 Apache Jakarta Commons Lang Apache License 2.0 Apache Jakarta Commons Logging Apache License 2.0 Apache Jakarta HTTP Client Apache License 2.0 Apache Log4j Apache License 2.0 Apache Neethi Apache License 2.0 Apache POI Apache License 2.0 Apache POI-org.apache.poi:poi-ooxml Apache License 2.0 Apache POI-org.apache.poi:poi-ooxml-schemas Apache License 2.0 Apache ServiceMix::Bundles::wsdl4j Apache License 2.0 Apache ServiceMix OSGI Common Bundles: jaxb-api Apache License 2.0 Apache ServiceMix OSGI Common Bundles: jaxb-impl Apache License 2.0 Apache Struts Apache License 2.0 Apache Velocity Apache License 2.0 Apache Xerces Java 1 XML Parser Apache License 2.0 Apache XML Security Java Apache License 2.0 Apache XML Xalan-Java Apache License 2.0 Apache XMLBeans Apache License 2.0 Apache XML-Commons Resolver Apache License 2.0 Apache-Ant Apache License 2.0 Apache-Jakarta BeanUtils Apache License 2.0 Apache-Jakarta Collections Apache License 2.0 Apache-Jakarta Digester Apache License 2.0 Apache-Jakarta Net Apache License 2.0 Apache-Jakarta Pool Apache License 2.0 buildr-jaxb-xjc Apache License 2.0 catalina-ant Apache License 2.0 Commons BeanUtils Bean Collections Apache License 2.0 Commons Collections Apache License 2.0

Component License

Commons DBCP Apache License 2.0 Commons Lang Apache License 2.0 Commons Net Apache License 2.0 dom4j (for Apache Directory Studio) Apache License 2.0 jaas Apache License 2.0 Jakarta Commons-Logging Apache License 2.0 jasper-compiler Apache License 2.0 jasper-runtime Apache License 2.0 Java Image Filters Apache License 2.0 jsp-api Apache License 2.0 JTA 1.0.1B Apache License 2.0 Log4j (for Apache Directory Studio) Apache License 2.0 Quartz Apache License 2.0 servlet-api Apache License 2.0 SNMP4J Apache License 2.0 SNMP4J Agent Apache License 2.0 Spring Framework: Beans Apache License 2.0 Spring Framework: Core Apache License 2.0 struts Apache License 2.0 Woodstox Apache License 2.0 Xalan Java Apache License 2.0 Xerces2 Java Parser Apache License 2.0 Xerces2-j-xerces: xercesImpl Apache License 2.0 XML Commons External Components XML APIs Apache License 2.0 XML Commons External Components XML APIs Extensions Apache License 2.0 XmlBeans Apache License 2.0 jlayout BSD License MSV XML Schema Library BSD License relaxng-datatype (java) BSD License JAXB 2.0 Project CDDL 1.0 Cryptix JCE Cryptix General License CyberNeko HTML Parser-(NekoHTML) CyberNeko Software License 1.0 DOM4J-Flexible XML Framework for Java dom4j License (BSD 2.0 +) jaxen Jaxen License JDOM Jdom License DynamicReports-core LGPL 2.1 iText, a JAVA-PDF library LGPL 2.1

Component License

JasperReports LGPL 2.1 JFreeChart-1. JFreeChart LGPL 2.1 JFreeChart-3. JCommon LGPL 2.1 SwingX LGPL 2.1 LIBSMI-Main Libsmi License AIRforiOSLoadExternalSWFTest MIT License FlexDock MIT License httpunit MIT License jmockit MIT License jQuery JavaScript Library MIT License jqueryclient MIT License jqueryui-module MIT License Simple AJAX Code-Kit-SACK MIT License SLF4J API Module MIT License SLF4J JDK14 Binding MIT License swfobject MIT License iText, a JAVA-PDF library Mozilla Public License 1.1 Mozilla Rhino: JavaScript for Java Mozilla Public License 1.1 JavaMail Sun JavaMail 1.4 License

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/).” 4. The names “Apache Server” and “Apache Group” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called “Apache” nor may “Apache” appear in their names without prior written permission of the Apache Group. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/).”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ======This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based on public domain software written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications, University of Illinois, Urbana- Champaign. For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server project, please see {http://www.apache.org/}.

Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. “License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.

“Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

“Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50 %) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. “You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

“Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

“Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

“Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

“Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

“Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”

“Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions: (a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and (b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and (c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and (d) If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third- party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and provide additional or different license terms and conditions use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, roduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON- INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets “[]” replaced with your own identifying information. (Don’t include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives.

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  Neither the name of the nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

COMMON DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION LICENSE (CDDL) Version 1.0 1. Definitions. 1.1. “Contributor” means each individual or entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications. 1.2. “Contributor Version” means the combination of the Original Software, prior Modifications used by a Contributor (if any), and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor. 1.3. “Covered Software” means (a) the Original Software, or (b) Modifications, or (c) the combination of files containing Original Software with files containing Modifications, in each case including portions thereof. 1.4. “Executable” means the Covered Software in any form other than Source Code. 1.5. “Initial Developer” means the individual or entity that first makes Original Software available under this License. 1.6. “Larger Work” means a work which combines Covered Software or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License. 1.7. “License” means this document. 1.8. “Licensable” means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein. 1.9. “Modifications” means the Source Code and Executable form of any of the following: A. Any file that results from an addition to, deletion from or modification of the contents of a file containing Original Software or previous Modifications; B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Software or previous Modification; or C. Any new file that is contributed or otherwise made available under the terms of this License. 1.10. “Original Software” means the Source Code and Executable form of computer software code that is originally released under this License. 1.11. “Patent Claims” means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor. 1.12. “Source Code” means (a) the common form of computer software code in which modifications are made and (b) associated documentation included in or with such code. 1.13. “You” (or “Your”) means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License. For legal entities, “You” includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, “control” means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50 %) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.

2. License Grants. 2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. Conditioned upon Your compliance with Section 3.1 below and subject to third party intellectual property claims, the Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license: (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Software (or portions thereof), with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Software, to make, have made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Software (or portions thereof). (c) The licenses granted in Sections 2.1 (a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes or otherwise makes the Original Software available to a third party under the terms of this License. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1 (b) above, no patent license is granted: (1) for code that You delete from the Original Software, or (2) for infringements caused by: (i) the modification of the Original Software, or (ii) the combination of the Original Software with other software or devices. 2.2. Contributor Grant. Conditioned upon Your compliance with Section 3.1 below and subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license: (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof), either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Software and/or as part of a Larger Work; and (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: (1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions thereof); and (2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination). (c) The licenses granted in Sections 2.2 (a) and 2.2 (b) are effective on the date Contributor first distributes or otherwise makes the Modifications available to a third party. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2 (b) above, no patent license is granted: (1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; (2) for infringements caused by: (i) third party modifications of Contributor Version, or (ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or (3) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Software in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.

3. Distribution Obligations. 3.1. Availability of Source Code. Any Covered Software that You distribute or otherwise make available in Executable form must also be made available in Source Code form and that Source Code form must be distributed only under the terms of this License. You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code form of the Covered Software You distribute or otherwise make available. You must inform recipients of any such Covered Software in Executable form as to how they can obtain such Covered Software in Source Code form in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange. 3.2. Modifications. The Modifications that You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License. You represent that You believe Your Modifications are Your original creation(s) and/or You have sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License. 3.3. Required Notices. You must include a notice in each of Your Modifications that identifies You as the Contributor of the Modification. You may not remove or alter any copyright, patent or trademark notices contained within the Covered Software, or any notices of licensing or any descriptive text giving attribution to any Contributor or the Initial Developer. 3.4. Application of Additional Terms. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Covered Software in Source Code form that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients rights hereunder. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Software. However, you may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear that any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. 3.5. Distribution of Executable Versions. You may distribute the Executable form of the Covered Software under the terms of this License or under the terms of a license of Your choice, which may contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable form does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient’s rights in the Source Code form from the rights set forth in this License. If You distribute the Covered Software in Executable form under a different license, You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.

3.6. Larger Works. You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Software with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Software.

4. Versions of the License. 4.1. New Versions. Sun Microsystems, Inc. is the initial license steward and may publish revised and/or new versions of this License from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number. Except as provided in Section 4.3, no one other than the license steward has the right to modify this License. 4.2. Effect of New Versions. You may always continue to use, distribute or otherwise make the Covered Software available under the terms of the version of the License under which You originally received the Covered Software. If the Initial Developer includes a notice in the Original Software prohibiting it from being distributed or otherwise made available under any subsequent version of the License, You must distribute and make the Covered Software available under the terms of the version of the License under which You originally received the Covered Software. Otherwise, You may also choose to use, distribute or otherwise make the Covered Software available under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by the license steward. 4.3. Modified Versions. When You are an Initial Developer and You want to create a new license for Your Original Software, You may create and use a modified version of this License if You: (a) rename the license and remove any references to the name of the license steward (except to note that the license differs from this License); and (b) otherwise make it clear that the license contains terms which differ from this License.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. COVERED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.

6.TERMINATION. 6.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive. 6.2. If You assert a patent infringement claim (excluding declaratory judgment actions) against Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You assert such claim is referred to as “Participant”) alleging that the Participant Software (meaning the Contributor Version where the Participant is a Contributor or the Original Software where the Participant is the Initial Developer) directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted directly or indirectly to You by such Participant, the Initial Developer (if the Initial Developer is not the Participant) and all Contributors under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively and automatically at the expiration of such 60 day notice period, unless if within such 60 day period You withdraw Your claim with respect to the Participant Software against such Participant either unilaterally or pursuant to a written agreement with Participant. 6.3. In the event of termination under Sections 6.1 or 6.2 above, all end user licenses that have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination (excluding licenses granted to You by any distributor) shall survive termination.

7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED SOFTWARE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY’S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

8. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Covered Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of “commercial computer software” (as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 252.227-7014 (a)(1)) and “commercial computer software documentation” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).

Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Software with only those rights set forth herein. This U.S. Government Rights clause is in lieu of, and supersedes, any other FAR, DFAR, or other clause or provision that addresses Government rights in computer software under this License.

9. MISCELLANEOUS. This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by the law of the jurisdiction specified in a notice contained within the Original Software (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding such jurisdiction’s conflict-of-law provisions. Any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the courts located in the jurisdiction and venue specified in a notice contained within the Original Software, with the losing party responsible for costs, including, without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License. You agree that You alone are responsible for compliance with the United States export administration regulations (and the export control laws and regulation of any other countries) when You use, distribute or otherwise make available any Covered Software.

10. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS. As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The CyberNeko Software License, Version 1.0 (c) Copyright 2002, 2003, Andy Clark. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by Andy Clark.” Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments normally appear. 4. The names “CyberNeko” and “NekoHTML” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected]. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called “NekoHTML”, nor may “NekoHTML” appear in their name, without prior written permission of the author.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR OTHER CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ======

This license is based on the Apache Software License, version 1.1.

dom4j License Copyright 2001-2005(c) MetaStuff, Ltd. All Rights Reserved. Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation (“Software”), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain copyright statements and notices. Redistributions must also contain a copy of this document. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name “DOM4J” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without prior written permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. For written permission, please contact [email protected]. 4. Products derived from this Software may not be called “DOM4J” nor may “DOM4J” appear in their names without prior written permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. DOM4J is a registered trademark of MetaStuff, Ltd. 5. Due credit should be given to the DOM4J Project-http://www.dom4j.org

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY METASTUFF, LTD. AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL METASTUFF, LTD. OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

jaxen License Copyright 2003(c) The Werken Company. All Rights Reserved. Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation (“Software”), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain copyright statements and notices. Redistributions must also contain a copy of this document. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name “jaxen” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without prior written permission of The Werken Company. For written permission, please contact [email protected]. 4. Products derived from this Software may not be called “jaxen” nor may “jaxen” appear in their names without prior written permission of The Werken Company. “jaxen” is a registered trademark of The Werken Company. 5. Due credit should be given to The Werken Company. (http://jaxen.werken.com/).

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE WERKEN COMPANY AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE WERKEN COMPANY OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the disclaimer that follows these conditions in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name “JDOM” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact {request_AT_jdom_DOT_org}. 4. Products derived from this software may not be called “JDOM”, nor may “JDOM” appear in their name, without prior written permission from the JDOM Project Management {request_AT_jdom_DOT_org}.

In addition, we request (but do not require) that you include in the end-user documentation provided with the redistribution and/or in the software itself an acknowledgement equivalent to the following:

“This product includes software developed by the JDOM Project (http://www.jdom.org/).”

Alternatively, the acknowledgment may be graphical using the logos available at http://www.jdom.org/images/logos.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE JDOM AUTHORS OR THE PROJECT CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright(c) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0) This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”. A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) “Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1) You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2) You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application.

Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3) You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4) You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5) A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”.

The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6) As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface- compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.

d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7) You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8) You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9) You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10) Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

11) If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty- free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12) If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13) The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14) If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY 15) BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16) IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it does. Copyright(c) year name of author

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

Signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice

libsmi license Copyright(c) 1999-2002 Frank Strauss, Technical University of Braunschweig. This software is copyrighted by Frank Strauss, the Technical University of Braunschweig, and other parties. The following terms apply to all files associated with the software unless explicitly disclaimed in individual files.

The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that existing copyright notices are retained in all copies and that this notice is included verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty fee is required for any of the authorized uses. Modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their authors and need not follow the licensing terms described here, provided that the new terms are clearly indicated on the first page of each file where they apply.

IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR DISTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, ITS DOCUMENTATION, OR ANY DERIVATIVES THEREOF, EVEN IF THE AUTHORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, AND THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS HAVE NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.

The MIT License Copyright(c)

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1.1 1. Definitions. 1.0.1. “Commercial Use” means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party. 1.1. “Contributor” means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications. 1.2. “Contributor Version” means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor. 1.3. “Covered Code” means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case including portions thereof. 1.4. “Electronic Distribution Mechanism” means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data. 1.5. “Executable” means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code. 1.6. “Initial Developer” means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A. 1.7. “Larger Work” means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License. 1.8. “License” means this document. 1.8.1. “Licensable” means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein. 1.9. “Modifications” means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is: A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications. B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications. 1.10. “Original Code” means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License.

1.10.1. “Patent Claims” means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor. 1.11. “Source Code” means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor’s choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge. 1.12. “You” (or “Your”) means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1. For legal entities, “You” includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, “control” means(a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50 %) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.

2. Source Code License. 2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property claims: (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and (b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof). (c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1 (a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the terms of this License. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1 (b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices. 2.2. Contributor Grant. Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a Larger Work; and (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination).

(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2 (a) and 2.2 (b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the Covered Code. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2 (b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.

3. Distribution Obligations. 3.1. Application of License. The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including without limitation Section2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients’ rights hereunder. However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5. 3.2. Availability of Source Code. Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party. 3.3. Description of Modifications. You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code.

3.4. Intellectual Property Matters (a) Third Party Claims. If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party’s intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code distribution titled “LEGAL” which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has been obtained. (b) Contributor APIs. If Contributor’s Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this information in the LEGAL file. (c) Representations. Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4 (a) above, Contributor believes that Contributor’s Modifications are Contributor’s original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License. 3.5. Required Notices. You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s) You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients’ rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. 3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions. You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients’ rights relating to the Covered Code.

You may distribute the Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient’s rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer. 3.7. Larger Works. You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code.

4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation. If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it.

5. Application of this License. This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code.

6. Versions of the License. 6.1. New Versions. Netscape Communications Corporation (“Netscape”) may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number. 6.2. Effect of New Versions. Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License. 6.3. Derivative Works. If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases “Mozilla”, “MOZILLAPL”, “MOZPL”, “Netscape”, “MPL”, “NPL” or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)

7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.

8. TERMINATION. 8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive. 8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred to as “Participant”) alleging that: (a) such Participant’s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above. (b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant’s Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1 (b) and 2.2 (b) are revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that Participant.

8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant’s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license. 8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination.

9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY’S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Covered Code is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.

11. MISCELLANEOUS. This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License.

12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS. As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability.

13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE. Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as Multiple-Licensed. Multiple-Licensedmeans that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the MPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A.

EXHIBIT A-Mozilla Public License. “The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ Software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License. The Original Code is ______. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ______. Portions created by ______are Copyright(c) ______. All Rights Reserved. Contributor(s): ______. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the [___] License), in which case the provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the [___] License.”

[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]

Sun JavaMail 1.4 License A. Sun Microsystems, Inc. (“Sun”) ENTITLEMENT for SOFTWARE Licensee/Company: Entity receiving Software. Effective Date: Date of delivery of the Software to You. Software: JavaMail 1.4. License Term: Perpetual (subject to termination under the SLA). Licensed Unit: Software Copy. Licensed unit Count: Unlimited. Permitted Uses:

1. You may reproduce and use the Software for Individual, Commercial, or Research and Instructional Use for the purposes of designing, developing, testing, and running Your applets and application (“Programs”). 2. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement and restrictions and exceptions set forth in the Software’s documentation, You may reproduce and distribute portions of Software identified as a redistributable in the documentation (“Redistributable”), provided that: a. you distribute Redistributable complete and unmodified and only bundled as part of Your Programs, b. your Programs add significant and primary functionality to the Redistributable, c. you distribute Redistributable for the sole purpose of running your Programs, d. you do not distribute additional software intended to replace any component(s) of the Redistributable, e. you do not remove or alter any proprietary legends or notices contained in or on the Redistributable. f. you only distribute the Redistributable subject to a license agreement that protects Sun’s interests consistent with the terms contained in this Agreement, and g. you agree to defend and indemnify Sun and its licensors from and against any damages, costs, liabilities, settlement amounts and/or expenses (including attorneys’ fees) incurred in connection with any claim, lawsuit or action by any third party that arises or results from the use or distribution of any and all Programs and/or Redistributable. 3. Java Technology Restrictions. You may not create, modify, or change the behavior of, or authorize your licensees to create, modify, or change the behavior of, classes, interfaces, or subpackages that are in any way identified as “java”, “javax”, “sun” or similar convention as specified by Sun in any naming convention designation.

B. Sun Microsystems, Inc. (“Sun”) SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT READ THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE OPENING SOFTWARE MEDIA PACKAGE. BY OPENING SOFTWARE MEDIA PACKAGE, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU ARE ACCESSING SOFTWARE ELECTRONICALLY, INDICATE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS BY SELECTING THE “ACCEPT” BUTTON AT THE END OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS, PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNUSED SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A REFUND OR, IF SOFTWARE IS ACCESSED ELECTRONICALLY, SELECT THE “DECLINE” (OR “EXIT”) BUTTON AT THE END OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU HAVE SEPARATELY AGREED TO LICENSE TERMS (“MASTER TERMS”) FOR YOUR LICENSE TO THIS SOFTWARE, THEN SECTIONS 1-5 OF THIS AGREEMENT (“SUPPLEMENTAL LICENSE TERMS”) SHALL SUPPLEMENT AND SUPERSEDE THE MASTER TERMS IN RELATION TO THIS SOFTWARE.

1. Definitions. a. “Entitlement” means the collective set of applicable documents authorized by Sun evidencing your obligation to pay associated fees (if any) for the license, associated Services, and the authorized scope of use of Software under this Agreement. b. “Licensed Unit” means the unit of measure by which your use of Software and/or Service is licensed, as described in your Entitlement. c. “Permitted Use” means the licensed Software use(s) authorized in this Agreement as specified in your Entitlement. The Permitted Use for any bundled Sun software not specified in your Entitlement will be evaluation use as provided in Section 3. d. “Service” means the service(s) that Sun or its delegate will provide, if any, as selected in your Entitlement and as further described in the applicable service listings at www.sun.com/service/servicelist. e. “Software” means the Sun software described in your Entitlement. Also, certain software may be included for evaluation use under Section 3. f. “You” and “Your” means the individual or legal entity specified in the Entitlement, or for evaluation purposes, the entity performing the evaluation.

2. License Grant and Entitlement. Subject to the terms of your Entitlement, Sun grants you a nonexclusive, nontransferable limited license to use Software for its Permitted Use for the license term. Your Entitlement will specify a. Software licensed, b. the Permitted Use, c. the license term, and d. the Licensed Units.

Additionally, if your Entitlement includes Services, then it will also specify the e. Service and f. service term.

If your rights to Software or Services are limited in duration and the date such rights begin is other than the purchase date, your Entitlement will provide that beginning date(s). The Entitlement may be delivered to you in various ways depending on the manner in which you obtain Software and Services, for example, the Entitlement may be provided in your receipt, invoice or your contract with Sun or authorized Sun reseller. It may also be in electronic format if you download Software.

3. Permitted Use. As selected in your Entitlement, one or more of the following Permitted Uses will apply to your use of Software. Unless you have an Entitlement that expressly permits it, you may not use Software for any of the other Permitted Uses. If you don’t have an Entitlement, or if your Entitlement doesn’t cover additional software delivered to you, then such software is for your Evaluation Use. a. Evaluation Use. You may evaluate Software internally for a period of 90 days from your first use. b. Research and Instructional Use. You may use Software internally to design, develop and test, and also to provide instruction on such uses. c. Individual Use. You may use Software internally for personal, individual use. d. Commercial Use. You may use Software internally for your own commercial purposes. e. Service Provider Use. You may make Software functionality accessible (but not by providing Software itself or through outsourcing services) to your end users in an extranet deployment, but not to your affiliated companies or to government agencies.

Licensed Units. Your Permitted Use is limited to the number of Licensed Units stated in your Entitlement. If you require additional Licensed Units, you will need additional Entitlement(s).

Restrictions. (a) The copies of Software provided to you under this Agreement are licensed, not sold, to you by Sun. Sun reserves all rights not expressly granted. (b) You may make a single archival copy of Software, but otherwise may not copy, modify, or distribute Software. However if the Sun documentation accompanying Software lists specific portions of Software, such as header files, class libraries, reference source code, and/or redistributable files, that may be handled differently, you may do so only as provided in the Sun documentation. (c) You may not rent, lease, lend or encumber Software.

(d) Unless enforcement is prohibited by applicable law, you may not decompile, or reverse engineer Software. (e) The terms and conditions of this Agreement will apply to any Software updates, provided to you at Sun’s discretion, that replace and/or supplement the original Software, unless such update contains a separate license. (f) You may not publish or provide the results of any benchmark or comparison tests run on Software to any third party without the prior written consent of Sun. (g) Software is confidential and copyrighted. (h) Unless otherwise specified, if Software is delivered with embedded or bundled software that enables functionality of Software, you may not use such software on a stand-alone basis or use any portion of such software to interoperate with any program(s) other than Software. (i) Software may contain programs that perform automated collection of system data and/or automated software updating services. System data collected through such programs may be used by Sun, its subcontractors, and its service delivery partners for the purpose of providing you with remote system services and/or improving Sun’s software and systems. (j) Software is not designed, licensed or intended for use in the design, construction, operation or maintenance of any nuclear facility and Sun and its licensors disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for such uses. (k) No right, title or interest in or to any trademark, service mark, logo or trade name of Sun or its licensors is granted under this Agreement.

Term and Termination. The license and service term are set forth in your Entitlement(s). Your rights under this Agreement will terminate immediately without notice from Sun if you materially breach it or take any action in derogation of Sun’s and/or its licensors’ rights to Software. Sun may terminate this Agreement should any Software become, or in Sun’s reasonable opinion likely to become, the subject of a claim of intellectual property infringement or trade secret misappropriation. Upon termination, you will cease use of, and destroy, Software and confirm compliance in writing to Sun. Sections 1, 5, 6, 7, and 9-15 will survive termination of the Agreement.

Java Compatibility and Open Source. Software may contain Java technology. You may not create additional classes to, or modifications of, the Java technology, except under compatibility requirements available under a separate agreement available at www.java.net. Sun supports and benefits from the global community of open source developers, and thanks the community for its important contributions and open standards-based technology, which Sun has adopted into many of its products. Please note that portions of Software may be provided with notices and open source licenses from such communities and third parties that govern the use of those portions, and any licenses granted hereunder do not alter any rights and obligations you may have under such open source licenses, however, the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provisions in this Agreement will apply to all Software in this distribution.

Limited Warranty. Sun warrants to you that for a period of 90 days from the date of purchase, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt, the media on which Software is furnished (if any) will be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. Except for the foregoing, Software is provided “AS IS”. Your exclusive remedy and Sun’s entire liability under this limited warranty will be at Sun’s option to replace Software media or refund the fee paid for Software. Some states do not allow limitations on certain implied warranties, so the above may not apply to you. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have others, which vary from state to state.

Disclaimer of Warranty. UNLESS SPECIFIED IN THIS AGREEMENT, ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT THESE DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.

Limitation of Liability. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL SUN OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT OR DATA, OR FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SUN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event will Sun’s liability to you, whether in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, exceed the amount paid by you for Software under this Agreement. The foregoing limitations will apply even if the above stated warranty fails of its essential purpose. Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so some of the terms above may not be applicable to you.

Export Regulations. All Software, documents, technical data, and any other materials delivered under this Agreement are subject to U.S. export control laws and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. You agree to comply strictly with these laws and regulations and acknowledge that you have the responsibility to obtain any licenses to export, re- export, or import as may be required after delivery to you. U.S. Government Restricted Rights. If Software is being acquired by or on behalf of the U.S. Government or by a U.S. Government prime contractor or subcontractor (at any tier), then the Government’s rights in Software and accompanying documentation will be only as set forth in this Agreement; this is in accordance with 48 CFR 227.7201 through 227.7202-4 (for Department of Defense (DOD) acquisitions) and with 48 CFR 2.101 and 12.212 (for non-DOD acquisitions).

Governing Law. Any action related to this Agreement will be governed by California law and controlling U.S. federal law. No choice of law rules of any jurisdiction will apply.

Severability. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable, this Agreement will remain in effect with the provision omitted, unless omission would frustrate the intent of the parties, in which case this Agreement will immediately terminate.

Integration. This Agreement, including any terms contained in your Entitlement, is the entire agreement between you and Sun relating to its subject matter. It supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, representations and warranties and prevails over any conflicting or additional terms of any quote, order, acknowledgment, or other communication between the parties relating to its subject matter during the term of this Agreement. No modification of this Agreement will be binding, unless in writing and signed by an authorized representative of each party. Please contact Sun Microsystems, Inc. 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054 if you have questions.

ABBREVIATION

A ACL Access Control List AES Advanced Encryption Standard AP Access Point APC Access Point Controller

B BSS Basic Service Set BYOD Bring Your Own Device

C CAC Call Admission Control CAPWAP Control And Provisioning Wireless Access Point CCTV Closed Circuit Television CHDC Coverage Hold Detection and Control CLI Command Line Interface CPU Central Processing Unit CSV Comma Separated Values

D DB Database DCS Data Coding Scheme DES Data Encryption Standard DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DMZ Demilitarized Zone DNAT Dynamic Network Address Translation DNS Domain Name Service DPC Dynamic Power Control DSCP DiffServ Code Point DTIM Delivery Traffic Identification Maps DTLS Datagram Transmission Layer Security

E EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol EDCA Enhanced Distributed Channel Access

F FTP File Transfer Protocol FFT Fast Fourier Transform

G GUI Graphic User Interface

H HO Handover HTML Hypertext Markup Language HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol

I I/O Input/Output ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol ID Identification IRFM Infrared Financial Management IP Internet Protocol IPC Inter Process Communication

J JDBC Java Database Connectivity JSP Java Server Page

M MAC Media Access Control MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme MD5 Message-Digest algorithm 5 MDI Medium Dependent Interface MDI-X Medium Dependent Interface-Crossover MOS Mean Opinion Score MSDU MAC Service Data Unit

N NAT Network Address Translation NE Network Element NTP Network Time Protocol

P PEAP Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol PDF Portable Document Format

Q QoS Quality of Service

R RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service RF Radio Frequency RMI Remote Method Invocation ROM Read Only Memory RPM Revolution Per Minute RRM Radio Resource Management RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator RTS Request To Send

S SAS Serial Attached SCSI sFTP secure File Transfer Protocol SHA Secure Hash Algorithm SNAT Static Network Address Translation SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNR Signal to Noise Ratio SSH Secure Shell SSID Service Set Identifier

T TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TCP Transmission Control Protocol ToS Type of Service

U UDP User Datagram Protocol

V VLAN Virtual Local Area Network VQM Voice Quality Manager

W WEM Wireless Enterprise Manager WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy Wi-Fi Wireless Fidelity WIPS Wireless Intrusion Prevention System WLAN Wireless Local Area Network

X XML Extensible Markup Language

WEM (Wireless Enterprise Manager) Operation Manual

Information in this manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics America No information contained here may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG. Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.